JP7179369B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine and a slot machine (so-called reel-type game machine), which are types of game machines, cards (for example, storage media such as prepaid cards) are transferred from a card unit (so-called CR unit). There is something that calls attention not to forget to take out. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, two areas near the firing handle are used to remind players not to forget to take out their cards.

JP 2013-090762 A (in particular, paragraph [0246], FIG. 32, etc.)

Today, it is desired to devise a method of not only calling attention to not forgetting to take out a card but also calling attention to addiction.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of effectively calling attention to addiction.

A gaming machine for solving the above problems is configured such that a game medium is returned to the player by operating a specific operation unit that can be operated by the player. 2. A gaming machine capable of generating a special state, comprising detection means capable of detecting the game medium entering through a specific opening, and effect control means for controlling effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means controls a user to pay attention to immersion. When the second special state occurs, the attention regarding the immersion is not executed, and when the first special state occurs, the attention regarding the immersion is executed. and the effect executing means can execute a call for attention regarding addiction in a specific period after starting execution of a call for attention regarding addiction after the final game in the first special state, and in addition, the specific period. after the end of the game, and even if the detecting means detects the game medium when the attention about the addiction is being drawn within the specific period, the attention about the addiction The execution of the alert is continued, but after that, the execution of the alert regarding the immersion ends when the specific period ends, and when the alert regarding the immersion is executed after the specific period ends, the detection means When the game medium is detected, the execution of the attention regarding immersion ends, and when the specific operation unit is operated while the attention regarding immersion is being executed within the specific period, the attention regarding immersion is given. The execution of the call is continued, and even if the specific operation unit is operated while the attention is being called for the immersion after the end of the specific period, the execution of the call for the attention of the immersion is continued. This is the gist of it.
The gaming machine is controlled to a specific state during which a period during which it is controlled to the first special state, a period during which it is controlled to the second special state, and a guidance effect that guides an operation that can obtain a profit is executed. In the advantageous period including the period of The aspect of calling attention to addiction executed after the final game in the first special state when is established is the above-mentioned It may be different from the form of calling attention to immersion executed after the final game in the first special state.

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively call attention to immersion.

The figure which shows the machine surface side of a slot machine. The figure which shows a production|presentation button. Figure 4 shows an information panel; The figure which shows the pushing order of a stop button. Diagram showing roles and prizes. The figure which shows a game state. The figure which shows a production|presentation state. (a) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the number of ceiling times according to the internal mode, and (b) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the transition destination internal mode according to the internal mode. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine; A diagram showing the winning probabilities of various bonus combinations according to set values. Flowchart showing a game progress main process. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when the navigation effect is executed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the effect display device when the settlement effect is executed, and (b) is an example of the display content of the effect display device when a warning regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. illustration. The figure which shows the execution start conditions of standby production. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when the standby effect is executed. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when the standby effect is executed. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display content of the effect display device when the menu is displayed, and (c) is an example of the display content of the effect display device when the display content related to volume adjustment is displayed. (d) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the effect display device when the display content is related to the effect explanation. The flowchart which shows a special stagnation process. (a) is a diagram showing the determination probability of the effect content of the appearance effect according to the set value, and (b) is a diagram showing the determination probability of the effect content of the starry sky effect according to the internal mode. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when the ending effect is executed after the last game in the bonus game state. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when the ending effect is executed after the final game in the advantageous effect state. The figure which shows an example of the game center where the slot machine and the pachinko game machine are installed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when a call for attention regarding immersion is executed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state; FIG. 12(c) is a view showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when a warning regarding immersion is executed after the variable game; The figure which shows an example of the display content. (a) to (c) are diagrams for explaining after the first bonus game state, after the single bonus game state, and after the first advantageous effect state. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the flow of effects when settlement processing is executed when a settlement button is operated. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the settlement button is operated after winning a bell role, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the settlement button is operated after winning a replay role. . The flowchart which shows the special stagnation process in 2nd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when the opening effect is executed before the first game in the bonus game state of the second embodiment, (c) and (d). ) shows an example of the display contents of the effect display device when the opening effect is executed before the first game in the advantageous effect state of the second embodiment. (a) to (c) show the case where the first bonus combination is won and the first bonus game state is generated, and the single bonus combination is won and the single bonus game state is generated in the second embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining a case and a case in which a promoted replay combination wins and is controlled to the first advantageous effect state. The flowchart which shows the special stagnation process in 3rd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when the interval effect is executed in the bonus game state in the third embodiment; The figure which shows an example of the display content of the production|presentation display apparatus when interval production|presentation is performed when it is in an advantage production|presentation state in embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the first bonus game state and the first advantageous effect state in the third embodiment. 12(a) and 12(b) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when a call for attention regarding immersion is executed in the fourth embodiment. FIG.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of a slot machine, which is a type of game machine, will be described below. In this specification, the directions of up, down, left, right, front (front), and back (rear) refer to the respective directions when viewed from a player playing a slot machine.

FIG. 1 shows a slot machine 10 as a game machine, and a sand unit SU provided side by side with the slot machine 10 in an island facility of a game hall.
The sand unit SU is provided with an insertion/return opening SUa for inserting a prepaid card as a storage medium. The sand unit SU is provided with a return button SUb that is operated when returning the inserted prepaid card. When the return button SUb is operated, the prepaid card is returned from the insertion return port SUa. The prepaid card stores, for example, the card balance as a value that can be used in a game, and the number of medals that have been obtained as an earned value. In addition, the sand unit SU is provided with a lending button SUc that is operated when borrowing medals as game media. The sand unit SU is provided with a medal lending opening SUd for ejecting medals to be borrowed. When the value stored in the prepaid card exists and the lending button SUc is operated, medals are ejected from the medal lending outlet SUd. In this embodiment, the tokens lent out by the sand unit SU correspond to gaming machine media based on the values stored in the storage media. The sand unit SU may be provided with a banknote slot for inserting banknotes, and the card balance of the prepaid card increases according to the banknotes inserted from the banknote slot.

The slot machine 10 has a main cabinet 11 shaped like a square box. The main body cabinet 11 has an opening (not shown) on its front surface. The slot machine 10 has an opening/closing door 12 covering the opening of the main body cabinet 11. - 特許庁The opening/closing door 12 is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the main body cabinet 11 .

A reel unit 13 is arranged inside the main body cabinet 11 . The reel unit 13 has a first reel 13a (left reel), a second reel 13b (middle reel) and a third reel 13c (right reel). The reels 13a to 13c are arranged side by side, the second reel 13b is arranged on the right side of the first reel 13a, and the third reel 13c is arranged on the right side of the second reel 13b. The reel unit 13 also has an actuator such as a stepping motor. Each of the reels 13a to 13c is configured to be rotatable (turnable) in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) independently of each other by operating an actuator. The reels 13a to 13c can be stopped independently of each other by stopping the operation of the actuator. The reel unit 13 also has reel sensors SE1 to SE3 (shown in FIG. 9) for detecting the rotational positions of the reels 13a to 13c. Specifically, the reel unit 13 includes a first reel sensor SE1 that detects the rotational position of the first reel 13a, a second reel sensor SE2 that detects the rotational position of the second reel 13b, and a rotational position of the third reel 13c. and a third reel sensor SE3 that detects the

A translucent film on which a plurality of patterns (identification information) are printed along the longitudinal direction is wound around each of the reels 13a to 13c. As a result, a plurality of patterns are arranged (arranged) along the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 13a to 13c. In this embodiment, 21 symbols are arranged on each of the reels 13a to 13c. The plurality of patterns include, for example, a replay pattern imitating the letters REPLAY, a bell pattern imitating a bell, a watermelon pattern imitating a watermelon, a cherry pattern imitating a cherry, a bar pattern imitating the letters BAR, and Arabic numerals. There is a seven pattern that imitates the "7" of.

Further, in the opening/closing door 12, a performance display device 14 is arranged in front of the reel unit 13 having the reels 13a to 13c. A transmissive display (transmissive liquid crystal display) is used for the effect display device 14 of the present embodiment. Thus, in this embodiment, the transmissive display is arranged on the front side of the plurality of reels. Note that the effect display device 14 may be, for example, a dot matrix display device or an organic EL display device. The performance display device 14 has a transparent region 14a as a transparent portion that makes it possible to see through (visually recognize) part of the symbols on the rotating reels 13a to 13c. That is, the slot machine 10 has a transmission region 14a (transmission portion). In the effect display device 14, the area surrounding the transmissive area 14a is a non-transmissive area in which part of the symbols on the reels 13a to 13c cannot be seen through (visible). In the present specification, the term “transparent” means a state in which the patterns of the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side of the effect display device 14 can be seen through the effect display device 14. shall refer to being

Each of the reels 13a to 13c is provided with a symbol stop position for stopping the symbol so that the player can visually recognize the symbol through the transmissive area 14a. Each of the reels 13a to 13c is provided with a plurality of symbol stop positions. In the slot machine 10, an upper stop position, a middle stop position and a lower stop position are set for each of the reels 13a to 13c. The transmissive area 14a is formed in a size that allows three patterns continuous in the circumferential direction on each of the reels 13a to 13c to be seen through. In other words, the transmissive area 14a is configured so that three symbols can be seen through each of the reels 13a to 13c. In this embodiment, by rotating each of the reels 13a to 13c, symbols are variably displayed so as to loop in the circumferential direction from top to bottom in the transmissive area 14a, and a variable game (game) is performed. Incidentally, in the reels 13a to 13c of the present embodiment, the types of symbols arranged on the respective reels 13a to 13c and the arrangement order of the symbols are different. In each of the reels 13a to 13c, it is preferable that at least one of the symbol types and symbol arrangement order on some reels is different from the symbol types and symbol arrangement on the other reels. However, the types of symbols and the arrangement order of symbols on some reels may be the same as the types of symbols and the arrangement order of symbols on other reels.

In the slot machine 10, a combination of stop positions selected one by one from three stop positions set for each of the reels 13a to 13c is a combination of effective stop positions that can determine a stopped symbol combination as a prize. is set. In the following description, a line connecting a plurality of stop positions forming a combination of effective stop positions is simply referred to as an effective line YL. In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the intermediate stop positions of the reels 13a to 13c form an effective line YL (combination of effective stop positions). The activated line is also called a winning line.

In the following explanation, when the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL is a symbol combination for which a prize is determined, it is defined as "winning". In the slot machine 10, when a symbol combination with a prize is won, a prize is given to the symbol combination. In this specification, "a symbol combination derived in a variable game" corresponds to a symbol combination that is stopped on the pay line YL in the variable game. Combinations other than valid combinations of stop positions are invalid combinations of stop positions (so-called invalid lines) in which the displayed symbol combination cannot be determined as winning.

The slot machine 10 has a plurality of backlights BL. Specifically, the slot machine 10 includes a backlight BL that illuminates the symbols stopped at the upper stop position, the middle stop position and the lower stop position of each of the reels 13a to 13c. The backlight BL is arranged inside the translucent films of the reels 13a to 13c, and illuminates each stop position from the inside of the translucent film. That is, in the slot machine 10, the backlight BL is installed behind the reels. Incidentally, the backlight BL illuminates the symbol stop positions on the rotating reels when the reels 13a to 13c are rotating. In this way, by illuminating the symbol stop position on the rotating reel, the symbols on the rotating reel can be visually recognized compared to the case where the symbol stop position on the rotating reel is not illuminated. Easier and more visible.

The slot machine 10 has a decoration lamp 15 on the front side of the opening/closing door 12. - 特許庁As one of the effects, the decorative lamp 15 executes effects (hereinafter referred to as light emission effects) in which the built-in luminous body emits light, blinks, and goes out. The slot machine 10 has a speaker 16 for outputting sound on the front side of the opening/closing door 12.例文帳に追加As one of the effects, the speaker 16 executes effects (hereinafter referred to as sound effects) of outputting sounds such as human voices, sound effects, and music. For example, sounds output from the speaker 16 include background music (so-called BGM).

The slot machine 10 has a medal slot 17 for inserting medals on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12.例文帳に追加The slot machine 10 has a medal selector inside. The medal selector has an insertion sensor SE4 for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 17 (shown in FIG. 9). The slot machine 10 also has a bet button 18 on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12 . The bet button 18 is means for betting medals from credits internally stored in the slot machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as bet). In the following description, betting on medals may be referred to as "bet" and the number of bets may be referred to as "bet number". Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a checkout button 19 as a checkout operating means on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12 . The settlement button 19 is a means to be operated when the bet medals or credits internally stored in the slot machine 10 are settled (refunded).

The slot machine 10 has a start lever 20 as a start operation section on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12 . The start lever 20 is means for performing a start operation for starting the rotation of the reels 13a-13c. That is, acceptance of the start operation serves as a trigger for starting the variable game. Further, the operation of the start lever 20 for starting rotation (movement) of the reels (starting the variable game) corresponds to the start operation, and in the slot machine 10, the variable game is started based on the start operation.

The slot machine 10 has a left stop button 21a (first stop button) on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. - 特許庁The left stop button 21a corresponds to the left reel 13a, and is means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of the left reel 13a. The slot machine 10 has a middle stop button 21b (second stop button) on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. - 特許庁The middle stop button 21b corresponds to the middle reel 13b, and is means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of the middle reel 13b. The slot machine 10 has a right stop button 21c (third stop button) on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. - 特許庁The right stop button 21c corresponds to the right reel 13c, and is means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of the right reel 13c. Thus, each stop button 21a-21c corresponds to each reel. The stop buttons 21a to 21c each correspond to a stop operating section. That is, the slot machine 10 has a plurality of stop operation units. Thus, the slot machine 10 is configured to be able to stop the rotation of the reels when the stop button is operated. Further, the operation of the stop button for stopping the spinning reels corresponds to the stop operation. Then, in the slot machine 10, rotation of the reels is stopped based on the stop operation.

The slot machine 10 is provided with a medal payout port 22 at the lower part of the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. - 特許庁The slot machine 10 has a tray 23 for receiving medals paid out from a medal payout port 22. - 特許庁The slot machine 10 includes a hopper unit HU (shown in FIG. 9) capable of paying out medals from the medal payout port 22 inside the machine. The medals inserted from the medal slot 17 pass through the medal selector and are stored in the hopper unit HU.

The slot machine 10 is provided with a heart movable body 25 corresponding to a specific movable body on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12 . The heart movable body 25 can move from an origin 25a to a movable reaching position 25b. The heart movable body 25 moves to the front side of the effect display device 14 when moving to the movable reaching position. The heart movable body 25 operates by receiving the operation from the first actuator A1 (shown in FIG. 9). The slot machine 10 also has a star movable body 26 on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12 . The star movable body 26 can move from an origin 26a to a movable reaching position 26b. The star movable body 26 does not move to the front side of the effect display device 14 even when it moves to the movable reaching position. The star movable body 26 operates by receiving the operation from the second actuator A2 (shown in FIG. 9).

The slot machine 10 has, on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12, performance buttons EB that can be operated by the player.
As shown in FIG. 2, the effect button EB is composed of a selection button SB and a menu button MB. The selection buttons SB are composed of an up button SBa, a right button SBb, a down button SBc, a left button SBd, and an enter button SBe. The menu button MB is provided together with the selection button SB.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an information panel 30 capable of displaying predetermined information on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. - 特許庁
As shown in FIG. 3 , the information panel 30 has an input possible display section 31 . The insertable display section 31 displays whether or not medals can be inserted, for example, by the lighting state of the light emitter. The information panel 30 has a replay display section 32 . The replay display unit 32 indicates whether or not it is a replay, depending on the lighting state of the light emitter, for example. The replay will be described later. The information panel 30 has a weight display section 33 . The wait display unit 33 indicates whether the wait time is in progress by, for example, the lighting state of the light emitter. The wait time is the shortest game time (minimum game time) set so that the number of variable games executed per unit time does not exceed a predetermined specified number of times. The information panel 30 has a status display section 34 . The status display unit 34 displays an error code or the like so that an error occurring in the slot machine 10 can be specified, for example.

The information panel 30 has a bet display section 35 . The bet display section 35 is composed of three light emitting sections. The bet display unit 35 displays the number of bets (number of bets) based on the lighting states of the three light emitting units. When the number of bets is "1", one of the three light emitting units constituting the bet display unit 35 lights up, and the remaining two light emitting units turn off. When the number of bets is "2", two of the three light emitting units constituting the bet display unit 35 are turned on, and the remaining one light emitting unit is turned off. When the number of bets is "3", all the light-emitting parts constituting the bet display part 35 light up.

The information panel 30 has a credit display section 36 . The credit display section 36 includes two 7-segment displays arranged side by side. The credit display section 36 displays the number of medals stored as credit inside the machine. Thus, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to store the number of medals (game media) as credits.

The information panel 30 has a payout display section 37 . The payout display section 37 includes two 7-segment displays arranged side by side. Thus, the payout display section 37 includes two 7-segment displays arranged side by side. The payout display unit 37 displays information (hereinafter referred to as payout information) regarding the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of a winning in the variable game. Note that the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of winning in the variable game is not the number of medals actually paid out from the medal payout port 22, but the number of medals added to the credits. It can also be said to be the number of medals given by the occurrence of winning. The payout display unit 37 displays information (hereinafter referred to as operation information) regarding the operation mode of the stop buttons 21a to 21c during execution of the variable game. Thus, the payout display unit 37 that displays payout information is also used as a display unit that displays (notifies) operation information. The operation information corresponds to information regarding the operation mode of the stop operation section. The order of pressing the stop buttons corresponds to the order of operation of the stop operation section.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the order of operation of the stop buttons 21a to 21c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the order of pushing), different stop buttons for the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation are pressed. As an order, there are a total of six types from the first push order to the sixth push order. For example, the first pressing order is the pressing order for operating the stop buttons 21a to 21c so that the rotation is stopped in the order of the left reel 13a→middle reel 13b→right reel 13c. In FIG. 4, when indicating the pressing order, the left stop button 21a is indicated as "left", the middle stop button 21b as "middle", and the right stop button 21c as "right". For example, the first pressing order is indicated as "left, middle, right." FIG. 4 shows reels whose rotation is stopped by a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation. For example, in the case of the first push order, the rotation of the left reel 13a is stopped by the first stop operation, the rotation of the middle reel 13b is stopped by the second stop operation, and the rotation of the right reel 13c is stopped by the third stop operation. It is shown that. The first pressing order “left, center, right” and the second pressing order, “left, right, center” correspond to the pressing order in which the left stop button 21a of the stop buttons 21a to 21c is operated first. The third pressing order "middle left and right" and the fourth pressing order "middle right left" correspond to the pressing order in which the middle stop button 21b among the stop buttons 21a to 21c is operated first. The fifth pressing order "right-left center" and the sixth pressing order "right-center left" correspond to the pressing order in which the right stop button 21c of the stop buttons 21a to 21c is operated first.

Next, based on FIG. 5, the symbol combinations for which prizes are determined will be described. It should be noted that the symbol combination for which the prize is determined is also referred to as a "role".
The symbol combinations (roles) for which prizes are determined include symbol combinations that determine bonuses as prizes (bonus hands), symbol combinations that determine payout of medals as prizes (payout hands), and symbol combinations that determine replays as prizes. There is a (replay role). Replay is the ability to start the next variable game without having to wager any medals.

A bonus game state (bonus state) is provided as a prize for the bonus combination. On the other hand, the payout of medals and replay are not determined as prizes for the bonus combination. In this way, the slot machine 10 is configured to be able to generate a bonus game state as a special state. In the following description, a symbol combination that is stopped on the pay line YL when a bonus combination is won is called a "bonus stop point". In this embodiment, the bonus stop number corresponds to the special display result. As shown in FIG. 5, the bonus combination includes, for example, a first bonus combination, a second bonus combination, and a single bonus combination. In the following description, among the first bonus combination, the second bonus combination and the single bonus combination, the first bonus combination and the second bonus combination may be collectively referred to as a specific bonus combination.

A first bonus game state (first bonus state) is provided as a prize for the first bonus combination. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the activated line YL when the first bonus combination is won is referred to as "first bonus stop". In this embodiment, the first bonus game state ends when the number of medals paid out in the first bonus game state exceeds 236. Thus, the end condition of the first bonus game state is established when the number of medals paid out in the first bonus game state exceeds 236.

For the second bonus combination, a second bonus game state (second bonus state) is provided as a prize. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the activated line YL when the second bonus combination is won is referred to as "second bonus stop point". In this embodiment, the second bonus game state ends when the number of medals paid out in the second bonus game state exceeds 86. Thus, the condition for ending the second bonus game state is established when the number of medals paid out in the second bonus game state exceeds 86.

A single bonus game state (single bonus state) is provided as a prize for the single bonus combination. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the pay line YL when a single bonus combination is won is referred to as a "single bonus stop point". In this embodiment, the single bonus game state ends when one variation game is played in the single bonus game state. That is, the single bonus game state ends when one game is completed in the single bonus game state. In this way, the conditions for ending the single-bonus game state are established when one game is finished in the single-bonus game state.

The number of variable games in the first bonus game state and the number of variable games in the second bonus game state are more than one. In this way, the number of games played in the single bonus game state is one, while the number of games played in the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state is more than one. Therefore, the number of games played in the single bonus game state is the smallest among the plurality of types of bonus game states. In the slot machine 10, the number of medals that can be obtained when the first bonus game state is generated is the number of medals that can be obtained when the second bonus game state is generated, and the number of medals that can be obtained when the second bonus game state is generated. more than the number of medals that can be obtained if Further, in the slot machine 10, the number of medals obtainable when the second bonus game state is generated is larger than the number of medals obtainable when the single bonus game state is generated. That is, the number of obtainable medals is the smallest when the single bonus game state is generated among the plurality of types of bonus game states. In this embodiment, at least one of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state corresponds to the first special state, and the single bonus game state corresponds to the second special state. In this embodiment, at least one of the first bonus stop dot and the second bonus stop dot corresponds to the first special display result, and the single bonus stop dot corresponds to the second special display result. Also, in this embodiment, the bonus game state corresponds to an advantageous state.

Payout of medals is determined as a prize for the payout combination. As shown in FIG. 5, payout combinations include, for example, a cherry combination, a watermelon combination, a bell combination, and a one-piece combination.
A predetermined number of medals (“two” in this embodiment) are paid out as a prize for the cherry combination. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the pay line YL when the cherry combination wins is referred to as a "cherry stop point". A predetermined number of medals (“three medals” in this embodiment) are paid out as a prize for the watermelon combination. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the pay line YL when the watermelon combination wins is referred to as a "watermelon stop point". A payout of a predetermined number of medals ("10 medals" in this embodiment) is determined as a prize for the Bell combination. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the pay line YL when the bell combination wins is referred to as a "bell stop point". A payout of a predetermined number of medals (in this embodiment, "1 medal") is determined as a prize for the one-piece combination. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the pay line YL when the one-piece winning combination is won is referred to as "bell spill stop point". In the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out does not mean the number of medals actually paid out from the medal payout port 22, but includes the number of medals added as credits and awarded to the player. equivalent to the number of

A replay is determined as a prize for the replay role. The replay role is also called a replay role. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the activated line YL when the replay combination wins is referred to as a "replay stop point". As shown in FIG. 5, the replay role includes, for example, a normal replay role and a promotion replay role. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the activated line YL when the normal replay combination wins is referred to as "normal replay stop point". Also, the symbol combination that is stopped on the activated line YL when the promotion replay combination wins is referred to as "promotion replay stop point".

The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to control the game state.
As shown in FIG. 6, the game states in the slot machine 10 include a first game state, a second game state, a carryover game state, a first bonus game state, a second bonus game state, and a single bonus game state.

In the slot machine 10, if the first bonus combination is not won in a variable game in which the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery, the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted (the first bonus combination is allowed to win). elected) is carried over. In this embodiment, after the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery, the winning of the first bonus combination continues to be permitted until the first bonus combination is won. In the slot machine 10, after the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery, the winning of the first bonus combination is continuously permitted from the next variation game. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, if the second bonus combination is not won in a variable game in which the second bonus combination is allowed to be won in the combination lottery, the second bonus combination is allowed to win (second Winning a bonus role) is carried over. In this embodiment, after the winning of the second bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery, the winning of the second bonus combination continues to be permitted until the second bonus combination is won. In the slot machine 10, after the winning of the second bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery, the winning of the second bonus combination is continuously permitted from the next variation game. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, if a single bonus role is not won in a variable game in which winning of a single bonus role is permitted among bonus roles, it is possible to allow a single bonus role to be won (single bonus role winning). not carried over.

In the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is not won in a variable game in which the winning of the first bonus combination is allowed, that is, when the winning of the first bonus combination is carried over, the game state is shifted to the carryover game state. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is not won in the variable game in which the winning of the second bonus combination is allowed, that is, when the winning of the second bonus combination is carried over, the carryover game state is entered. Transition. As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the winning of the specific bonus combination is carried over, the state is shifted to the carryover game state.

In the slot machine 10, the second gaming state is a gaming state in which winning of a replay combination is more likely to be allowed than in the first gaming state. Therefore, consumption of medals is suppressed in the second game state as compared to the first game state. Therefore, it can be said that the second game state is more advantageous than the first game state. The second game state is a so-called "replay time (RT)". Then, in the slot machine 10, when the promotion replay combination wins in the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state. In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the single winning combination is won in the second game state, the game state is shifted to the first game state.

In the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is won, the state is shifted to the first bonus game state. In the slot machine 10, the first bonus game state is generated by shifting to the first bonus game state. Then, in the slot machine 10, when the termination condition of the first bonus game state is established in the first bonus game state, the game state is shifted to the first game state. Also, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is won, the state is shifted to the second bonus game state. In the slot machine 10, the second bonus game state is generated by shifting to the second bonus game state. Then, in the slot machine 10, when the end condition of the second bonus game state is satisfied in the second bonus game state, the game state is shifted to the first game state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when a single bonus combination is won, the game state is shifted to a single bonus game state. In the slot machine 10, a single bonus game state is generated by shifting to the single bonus game state. Then, in the slot machine 10, when the end condition of the single-bonus game state is established in the single-bonus game state, the game state is shifted to the first game state. Thus, in this embodiment, the special state is generated after the special display result is derived.

In the slot machine 10, in the bonus game state, the winning probability of the payout combination in the combination lottery is higher than in the game states other than the bonus game state. The winning probability of the payout combination refers to the probability that the payout combination is allowed to win. In this way, in the bonus game state, the frequency of obtaining medals is improved as compared with game states other than the bonus game state. Therefore, it can be said that the bonus game state is more advantageous than the game states other than the bonus game state.

It is also said that winning a bonus combination is allowed in the combination lottery. In addition, it is said that winning of the bonus combination is carried over if the winning of the bonus combination continues to be permitted. In addition, the carryover gaming state is also referred to as "internal". On the other hand, the first game state and the second game state are also called "non-internal". In addition, in the game state other than the bonus game state, when the carryover game state in which the winning of the bonus combination is continuously permitted is set to the carryover state, the first game state and the second game state in which the winning of the bonus combination is not continuously permitted are the non-carryover state. It can be called a state. By the way, the bonus game state is also called "in-accessory", and the game state other than the bonus game state is also called "in non-accessory".

The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to control an effect state as an effect mode. There are multiple types of performance states. In each production state, production state identification information that can identify the production state during stay (the production state being controlled) is notified. In the slot machine 10, for example, a different background image is displayed on the effect display device 14 for each type of effect state, or the decorative lamp 15 is caused to emit light in a different color for each type of effect state, or for each type of effect state. Different music (for example, background music) is output from the speaker 16 to notify the presentation state identification information. Therefore, the player can recognize the effect state during the stay from the background image displayed on the effect display device 14, the luminescent color of the decoration lamp 15, the music output from the speaker 16, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect states of the slot machine 10 include a normal effect state, a preparation effect state, an advantageous effect state, and a bonus effect state. Advantageous production states in the slot machine 10 include a first advantageous production state, a second advantageous production state, and a special advantageous production state. The bonus effect state in the slot machine 10 includes a first bonus effect state and a second bonus effect state.

The normal effect state and the preparation effect state are mainly effect states to stay when in the first game state. The first advantageous effect state, the second advantageous effect state and the special advantageous effect state are mainly effect states to stay in the second game state. The first bonus effect state is mainly a state of effect in which the player stays in the first bonus game state. The second bonus effect state is mainly a state of effect in which the player stays in the second bonus game state.

In the slot machine 10, for example, a navigation effect (operation-related effect) is executed to notify the operation mode (operation timing and operation order) of the stop button for stopping the symbol combination for which the prize is determined on the activated line YL. . The navigation effect is also called an operation navigation effect (operation navigation) or a push order navigation effect (push order navigation). In the slot machine 10, when in the advantageous effect state, the ratio of executing the navigation effect with contents advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal effect state. Therefore, the advantageous rendering state is a so-called "assist time (AT)".

In particular, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the winning of the bell role is permitted in the advantageous effect state, a navigation effect is executed to notify the pressing order for winning the bell role. When the winning of the bell role is permitted in the effect state, the navigation effect of notifying the pressing order for winning the bell role is not executed. In the present embodiment, the pressing order for winning the bell combination corresponds to an operation capable of obtaining a profit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the navigation effect of notifying the pressing order for winning the bell combination corresponds to the guidance effect of guiding the operation that can obtain a profit. In the present embodiment, the advantageous effect state in which the navigation effect for informing the pressing order for winning the bell combination is executed corresponds to the specific state in which the guidance effect for guiding the operation capable of obtaining a profit is executed. . In this manner, the slot machine of this embodiment is configured to be able to generate a specific state.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the slot machine 10, when an advantageous permissible condition is satisfied in the normal effect state, the game shifts to the preparation effect state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous start condition is established in the preparation production state, the game shifts to the advantageous production state. At this time, even in the advantageous performance state, the state is shifted to the first advantageous performance state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when an advantageous ending condition is established in the advantageous effect state, the state is shifted to the normal effect state.

In the slot machine 10, when an advantageous promotion condition is established in the first advantageous presentation state, the state is shifted to the second advantageous presentation state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous demotion condition is established in the second advantageous effect state, the game is shifted to the first advantageous effect state. Further, when a special advantageous condition is established in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the state is shifted to the special advantageous effect state. In this embodiment, the advantageous effect state corresponds to an advantageous state. That is, the advantageous state in this embodiment includes a bonus game state and an advantageous effect state.

In the slot machine 10, when a specific bonus combination is won, the state is shifted to a bonus presentation state. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is won, the state is shifted to the first bonus presentation state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is won, the state is shifted to the second bonus presentation state.

In the slot machine 10, when a specific bonus end condition is established in the bonus effect state, the game is shifted to a different effect state from the bonus effect state. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, when the end condition of the first bonus game state is established in the first bonus effect state, the game is shifted to the effect state before the transition to the first bonus effect state. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the condition for ending the second bonus game state is established in the second bonus effect state, the game is shifted to the effect state before the transition to the second bonus effect state. For example, when the first bonus combination is won in the second advantageous performance state and the state is shifted to the first bonus performance state, the state is shifted to the second advantageous performance state after the end of the first bonus performance state. In addition, when the second bonus combination wins and shifts to the second bonus performance state in the normal performance state, the state shifts to the normal performance state after the end of the second bonus performance state. Incidentally, in the slot machine 10, even if a single bonus combination is won, the presentation state does not shift. For example, in the slot machine 10, even if a single bonus combination is won in the normal effect state, the normal effect state remains. Similarly, the slot machine 10 stays in the advantageous rendering state even if the single bonus combination wins in the advantageous rendering state.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are satisfied, the state is shifted to the normal effect state. The advantageous period includes a bonus effect state (bonus game state) and an advantageous effect state. That is, the advantageous period in this embodiment includes a special state and a specific state. The advantageous period means a period in which the game is continuously controlled to the advantageous effect state and the bonus effect state without being controlled to the normal effect state and the preparation effect state. The condition for ending the advantageous period is met when the internally stored advantageous upper limit reaches zero. In the slot machine 10, when the advantageous upper limit value reaches 0 in the advantageous effect state and the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the state is shifted to the normal effect state. Further, when the advantageous upper limit value reaches 0 due to being controlled to the first bonus performance state, that is, the occurrence of the first bonus game state, the normal performance state is controlled after the first bonus performance state ends. . At this time, even if the effect state before shifting to the first bonus effect state is the advantageous effect state, the first bonus effect state is established when the condition for ending the advantageous period is established by the occurrence of the first bonus game state. After the end of, it shifts to the normal production state. Similarly, when the advantageous upper limit reaches 0 by being controlled to the second bonus effect state, that is, the second bonus game state is generated, the normal effect state is controlled after the second bonus effect state ends. be. At this time, even if the effect state before shifting to the second bonus effect state is the advantageous effect state, the second bonus effect state is established when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the second bonus game state. After the end of, it shifts to the normal production state.

In this embodiment, the effect state controlled after the end of the bonus effect state corresponds to the special effect mode. In the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, the effect states controlled after the bonus effect state ends include a normal effect state, a preparation effect state and an advantageous effect state, which correspond to the special effect mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect state controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state corresponds to the specific effect mode. In this specification, "end of the advantageous effect state" excludes the case where the bonus effect state is controlled by the occurrence of the bonus game state in the advantageous effect state, and the change from the advantageous effect state to the normal effect state. It means the case of migration. Therefore, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect state controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state is the normal effect state, and the normal effect state corresponds to the specific effect mode.

The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to control an internal mode as an internal control state. The internal mode is also referred to as an internal lottery state. There are multiple types of internal modes. Specifically, the internal modes include a first internal mode, a second internal mode, and a third internal mode.

In the slot machine 10, the maximum number of variable games (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number) until the advantageous allowable condition is established after the advantageous effect state ends is determined. The ceiling number corresponds to the upper limit of the number of games required until the next advantageous effect state is generated.

Similarly, in the slot machine 10, the ceiling number is determined after the first bonus effect state (first bonus game state) or the second bonus effect state (second bonus game state) ends. Then, in the slot machine 10, the ceiling count is determined at a rate corresponding to the internal mode. In the slot machine 10, the range of the number of times to be determined as the ceiling number is determined according to the internal mode, and then the ceiling number is determined with equal probability or approximately equal probability from the range of the number of times to be determined as the ceiling number. .

As shown in FIG. 8(a), in the third internal mode, the maximum number of times that can be determined as the ceiling number is 128, whereas in the first internal mode or the second internal mode, the ceiling number is The maximum number of times that can be determined is 999 times. Therefore, in the third internal mode, the advantageous permissible condition is satisfied by executing the variable game up to 128 times after the advantageous effect state or the bonus effect state ends. Therefore, the third internal mode can be said to be an advantageous internal mode compared to the first internal mode and the second internal mode. Furthermore, in the second internal mode, a smaller number of ceiling times is more likely to be determined than in the first internal mode. Therefore, the second internal mode can be said to be an advantageous internal mode compared to the first internal mode.

In the slot machine 10, an internal mode is drawn by lottery after the end of the advantageous effect state. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, the transition destination internal mode is determined at a rate corresponding to the current internal mode. The current internal mode corresponds to the pre-transition internal mode, and the transition destination internal mode corresponds to the post-transition internal mode.

As shown in FIG. 8B, in the second internal mode, the third internal mode is more likely to be determined as the destination internal mode than in the first internal mode. Furthermore, when it is the second internal mode, the first internal mode is not determined as the destination internal mode. As described above, when the second internal mode is selected, an internal mode having a high degree of advantage as the transition destination internal mode is more likely to be determined than when the first internal mode is selected. From this point of view as well, the second internal mode can be said to be an advantageous internal mode compared to the first internal mode. Incidentally, when it is the third internal mode, the second internal mode is not determined as the transition destination internal mode, and the third internal mode is determined as the transition destination internal mode to continue the third internal mode, or The first internal mode is determined as the transition destination internal mode, and it is determined to demote to the first internal mode.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the third internal mode has a higher degree of advantage in generating an advantageous rendering state than the first internal mode or the second internal mode. In addition, in the slot machine 10, the second internal mode has a higher advantage with respect to the occurrence of the advantageous rendering state than the first internal mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second internal control state has a higher degree of advantage in generating an advantageous state than the first internal control state. In this embodiment, when the third internal mode is the second internal control state, at least one of the first internal mode and the second internal mode corresponds to the first internal control state, and the second internal mode is the second internal control state. In the case of the control state, the first internal mode corresponds to the first internal control state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 9, the slot machine 10 includes a main board 40 as a main control section inside the machine. The main board 40 outputs a control signal (control command) according to the result of processing. The slot machine 10 includes a sub-board 41 as a sub-control section inside the machine. The sub-board 41 performs predetermined processing based on the control information output by the main board 40 . For example, the sub-board 41 performs processing for executing a display effect by the effect display device 14 , a light emission effect by the decoration lamp 15 , and a sound effect by the speaker 16 . The main board 40 is connected to the sub board 41 . The main board 40 and the sub-board 41 are connected so that control information can be output in one direction from the main board 40 to the sub-board 41 .

First, the main board 40 will be described in detail.
The main substrate 40 includes a main control CPU 40a, a main control ROM 40b, and a main control RAM 40c. The main control CPU 40a performs various processes by executing a main control program. The main control ROM 40b stores a main control program, a lottery table used for a predetermined lottery, determination values, and the like.

The main control RAM 40c is configured to be able to store various information that can be rewritten as appropriate during operation of the slot machine 10. FIG. Information stored in the main control RAM 40c includes, for example, flags, counters and timers. The information stored in the main control RAM 40c includes information on credits and the like. The main board 40 is configured to be able to generate random numbers. For example, the random number may be generated as a hardware random number by mounting a random number generation circuit that updates the value of the random number every predetermined cycle on the main substrate 40, and the main control CPU 40a generates the random number every predetermined control cycle. It may be generated as a software random number by updating the value of .

The main board 40 is connected to the reel sensors SE1 to SE3 and the insertion sensor SE4. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to input detection signals output by various sensors SE1 to SE4 via ports. The main board 40 is connected to each actuator of the reels 13a-13c. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to control the operation of each actuator of the reels 13a to 13c via a drive circuit.

The main board 40 is connected to the bet button 18, the checkout button 19, the start lever 20 and the stop buttons 21a-21c. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to input detection signals output by the bet button 18, the checkout button 19, the start lever 20 and the stop buttons 21a to 21c via ports. The main board 40 is connected with the information panel 30 . The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to control the display contents of the information panel 30 via the drive circuit.

The main board 40 is connected to the set value switch 45 . The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to input an operation signal output when the set value switch 45 is operated via a port. The set value switch 45 is configured to be operable by using a predetermined key. In the following description, "the set value switch 45 is operated" means that the set value switch 45 is operated using a predetermined key. The set value switch 45 is provided on the rear side (back side) of the opening/closing door 12 .

A set value can be set by operating the set value switch 45 when power supply to the slot machine 10 is started. The setting value is composed of a plurality of steps, and any setting value can be set. That is, the slot machine 10 can change the set value by operating the set value switch 45 . The setting values in this embodiment include "1", "2" and "3", and any one of "1" to "3" can be set as the setting value. In the present embodiment, the operation of operating the set value switch 45 to change the set value along with the start of power supply corresponds to the setting change operation.

In the slot machine 10, a combination lottery is performed under a winning probability based on a set value. In the slot machine 10, the advantage differs depending on the set value, and the machine allocation differs. In the slot machine 10, the probability of winning a bonus combination, that is, the probability of winning a bonus combination in the combination lottery differs depending on the set value. In the present embodiment, allowing the winning of the bonus combination in the combination lottery corresponds to the lottery result of the combination lottery being a special result. In the present embodiment, the probability that the bonus combination is allowed to win in the combination lottery corresponds to the probability that the lottery result of the combination lottery will be a special result. In the following description, the probability of winning the bonus combination in the combination lottery may be referred to as "winning probability of bonus combination". Then, the probability of winning the first bonus role in the role lottery is "winning probability of the first bonus role", and the probability of winning the second bonus role in the role lottery is "winning probability of the second bonus role". , the probability of winning a single bonus role in the role lottery may be referred to as the "single bonus winning probability".

As shown in FIG. 10, in the combination lottery when the set value is "1" in the slot machine 10, the winning probability of the first bonus combination is "1/240" and the winning probability of the second bonus combination is "1/240". /320”, and the probability of winning the single bonus combination is “1/100”. Further, in the slot machine 10, in the combination lottery when the set value is "2", the probability of winning the first bonus combination is "1/230", the probability of winning the second bonus combination is "1/300", and the winning probability of the second bonus combination is "1/300". The winning probability of the bonus role is "1/100". Further, in the slot machine 10, in the combination lottery when the set value is "3", the probability of winning the first bonus combination is "1/200", the probability of winning the second bonus combination is "1/300", and the winning probability of the second bonus combination is "1/300". The winning probability of the bonus role is "1/100". Thus, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning a bonus role in the role lottery when the set value is "1" is the same as the bonus role in the role lottery when the set value is "2" or "3". lower than the odds of winning the role. Further, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning the bonus role in the lottery when the set value is "2" is higher than the probability of winning the bonus role in the lottery when the set value is "3". is also low. Thus, in the present embodiment, the probability that the lottery result of the role lottery will be a special result when the set value is the first set value is Lower than the odds of a special outcome. In this embodiment, when the first setting value is "1", at least one of "2" and "3" corresponds to the second setting value, and when the first setting value is "2", " 3” corresponds to the second set value.

Of the lottery tables stored in the main control ROM 40b, the combination lottery table and the lottery numbers used for the internal lottery for determining the winning number from among a plurality of winning numbers will be described. Hereinafter, the internal lottery for determining the winning number will be referred to as the role lottery. Winning numbers determined in the role lottery are also called condition device combinations. Therefore, the role lottery can also be said to be a "condition device combination lottery". In the following description, "a predetermined winning number is determined in a role lottery" may be expressed as "winning a predetermined winning number in a role lottery".

The winning number is control information that defines one or a plurality of symbol combinations as symbol combinations that can be derived (displayed) on the pay line YL. In other words, the winning number is a conditional device identifier that defines one or a plurality of winning combinations in the variable game. Winning numbers in this embodiment include, for example, a winning number that allows a bonus win, a winning number that allows a cherry win, a winning number that allows a watermelon win, and a bell win. Winning numbers that are allowed to be won and winning numbers that allow winning of replaying hands are included.

In the present embodiment, the winning numbers that allow the winning of the bonus combination include the winning number that allows the winning of the first bonus combination, the winning number that allows the winning of the second bonus combination, and the winning number that allows the winning of the single bonus combination. There is a winning number that is allowed to win a prize.

In this embodiment, winning a winning number that allows winning of a bonus combination corresponds to winning the bonus combination in the combination lottery, and corresponds to the lottery result of the combination lottery being a special result. Then, the "probability of winning a bonus role" in the role lottery corresponds to the probability of winning a winning number that allows the winning of a bonus role in the role lottery. Also, winning the winning number that allows the winning of the first bonus combination corresponds to winning the first bonus combination in the combination lottery. The "probability of winning the first bonus combination" in the above-described combination lottery corresponds to the probability of winning the winning number that allows the winning of the first bonus combination in the combination lottery. Similarly, winning the winning number that allows the winning of the second bonus combination corresponds to winning the second bonus combination in the combination lottery. The "probability of winning the second bonus combination" in the above-described combination lottery corresponds to the probability of winning the winning number that allows the winning of the second bonus combination in the combination lottery. Also, winning a winning number that allows winning of a single bonus combination corresponds to winning a single bonus combination in the combination lottery. Then, the "probability of winning a single bonus role" in the above-mentioned role lottery corresponds to the probability of winning a winning number that allows the winning of a single bonus role in the role lottery.

It should be noted that the winning number that allows the winning of the bonus hand may not be the winning number that allows the winning of only the bonus hand among the plurality of hands. For example, the winning of the cherry hand and the first bonus hand is permitted. It may be a winning number that allows winning of a replay combination and a second bonus combination. In the slot machine 10, when the winning of the bonus combination is permitted, if the winning of another payout combination or the replay combination is permitted, the winning of the other payout combination or the replay combination is given priority, and the bonus combination is awarded. Winning is carried over to the next variable game.

In the present embodiment, winning numbers that allow winning of the bell role include winning numbers that allow winning of only the bell role and winning numbers that allow winning of a single role in addition to the bell role. be. Winning numbers that are allowed to win bell and single-handed prizes must have a stop button operation order (push order) for winning a bell hand and a stop button operation order (push order) for winning a single-handle. order) and different winning numbers are included. For example, for winning numbers that are allowed to win a bell and a single winning combination, the bell combination wins when the stop button is operated in a predetermined order of operation, while the bell combination wins in an operation order different from the predetermined order of operation. When the stop button is operated, there is a winning number that wins a winning combination.

In this embodiment, the winning numbers that allow winning of the replay role include the winning numbers that allow the winning of only the normal replay role and the winning numbers that allow the winning of the normal replay role and the promotion replay role. There is a number and Winning numbers that allow winning of normal replay roles and promoted replay roles are the operation order (push order) of the stop button for winning the normal replay role and the operation for winning the promoted replay role Winning numbers with different order (push order) are included. For example, for the winning numbers that allow winning of the normal replay role and the promotion replay role, when the stop button is operated in a predetermined operation order, the normal replay role wins, while the predetermined operation order and the winning number. There is a winning number that wins a promotion replay role when the stop button is operated in a different order of operation.

In the following description, the case where the winning number that allows the winning of the first bonus combination is won in the combination lottery is indicated as "the case where the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted". Also, the case where the winning number that allows the winning of the second bonus combination is won in the combination lottery is indicated as "the case where the winning of the second bonus combination is permitted". In addition, the case where the winning number that allows the winning of the single bonus combination is won in the combination lottery is indicated as "the case where the winning of the single bonus combination is permitted". In addition, the case where the lottery wins the winning number that allows the winning of the cherry role is indicated as "the case where the winning of the cherry role is allowed". In addition, the case where the lottery wins the winning number that allows the winning of the role of watermelon is indicated as "the case where the winning of the role of watermelon is allowed". Similarly, the case where the winning number that allows the winning of the bell role is won in the role lottery is indicated as "the case where the winning of the bell role is allowed". In addition, the case where the winning number that allows the winning of the replaying role is won in the role lottery is indicated as "the case where the winning of the replaying role is allowed". In addition, the case where the lottery wins the winning number that allows the winning of the normal re-game role and the promoted re-game role is indicated as "the case where the winning of the promoted re-game role is allowed".

There are multiple types of combination lottery tables in the slot machine 10 . In the slot machine 10, a combination lottery table corresponding to the game state is used in the combination lottery. The combination lottery tables in this embodiment include a first combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the first game state, a second combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the second game state, and a combination lottery table in the carryover game state. There is a third combination lottery table used in. Further, the combination lottery table in the present embodiment includes a fourth combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the first bonus game state, a fifth combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the second bonus game state, and a single bonus. and a sixth combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the gaming state. The slot machine 10 has a first combination lottery table to a sixth combination lottery table for each set value. For example, among the 1st combination lottery table to the 6th combination lottery table, the 1st combination lottery table to the 3rd combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the game state other than the bonus game state are prepared for each set value. The 4th combination lottery table to the 6th combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the bonus game state need not be provided for each set value. Further, the combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in part or all of the game states of the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state and the single bonus game state may be shared. For example, the fourth combination lottery table may be used in the combination lotteries in the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state.

In the role lottery table, the value of the random number used for the role lottery (hereinafter referred to as the role lottery random number) is a value within the range that can be taken as the value of the role lottery random number for the winning number that can be determined. A predetermined number of them are distributed from among the .

In the 4th role lottery table to the 6th role lottery table, compared to the 1st role lottery table to the 3rd role lottery table, the probability of totaling the determination rate of the winning number that allows the winning of the bell role is increased. , the value of the random number for the role lottery is distributed. As a result, in the bonus game state, the winning of the bell combination is more likely to be permitted than in the game states other than the bonus game state. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the 4th combination lottery table to the 6th combination lottery table, among the winning numbers that allow the winning of the bell role, only the winning numbers that allow the winning of only the bell role can win. , the value of the random number for the role lottery is distributed.

In the slot machine 10, when none of the winning numbers is won in the winning combination lottery, that is, when the winning of the winning combination is not allowed, the lottery result of the winning combination lottery becomes "lost". Then, when the lottery result of the role lottery is lost, the symbol combination in which the prize is determined based on the lottery result of the role lottery is not derived. However, when the winning of the specific bonus combination is carried over and the lottery result of the combination lottery is lost, the carried-over specific bonus combination can be won.

In the slot machine 10, when the winning of the first bonus combination is carried over and the lottery result of the combination lottery is lost, the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated at the stop operation position capable of deriving the first bonus stop number. When operated, the reels 13a-13c are stopped so that the first bonus stop number is derived. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, when the lottery result of the combination lottery is lost when the winning of the first bonus combination is carried over, the stop operation position other than the stop operation position capable of deriving the first bonus stop number. When the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated at , the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that a winning stop number for which no prize is determined is derived. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the winning of the second bonus combination is carried over and the lottery result of the combination lottery is lost, the stop button 21a is at the stop operation position capable of deriving the second bonus stop number. 21c are operated, the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that the second bonus stop number is derived. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, if the lottery result of the combination lottery is lost when the winning of the second bonus combination is carried over, the stop operation position other than the stop operation position capable of deriving the second bonus stop number. When the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated at , the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that a winning stop number for which no prize is determined is derived.

Next, the sub-board 41 will be described in detail.
As shown in FIG. 9, the sub-board 41 includes a sub-control CPU 41a, a sub-control ROM 41b, and a sub-control RAM 41c. For example, the sub-control CPU 41a performs various types of processing (for example, processing related to effects) by executing a sub-control program. The sub-control ROM 41b stores a sub-control program, a lottery table used for lottery, determination values, and the like. The sub-control ROM 41b stores display effect data relating to the display effect in the effect display device 14. FIG. The sub-control ROM 41b stores light emission effect data relating to the light emission effect of the decorative lamp 15. FIG. The sub-control ROM 41b stores sound effect data relating to the sound effect in the speaker 16. FIG.

The sub-control RAM 41c is configured to be capable of storing various information that can be rewritten as appropriate during operation of the slot machine 10. FIG. Information stored in the sub-control RAM 41c includes, for example, flags, counters and timers. The sub-board 41 is configured to be able to generate random numbers. For example, the random number may be generated as a hardware random number by mounting a random number generation circuit that updates the value of the random number every predetermined period on the sub board 41, and the sub control CPU 41a generates the random number every predetermined control period. It may be generated as a software random number by updating the value of .

The sub-board 41 is connected to the effect display device 14 , the decoration lamp 15 and the speaker 16 . The sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the effect display device 14, the decoration lamp 15 and the speaker 16 via the drive circuit.

The sub-board 41 is connected to the selection button SB and the menu button MB. The sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be capable of inputting detection signals output by the selection button SB and the menu button MB via ports. Also, the sub-board 41 is connected to a volume adjuster 47 . The sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to input a signal indicating the maximum volume set by operating the volume adjuster 47 via a port. The slot machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that the maximum volume of the sound output from the speaker 16 can be set within a predetermined range by operating the volume adjuster 47 . The volume adjuster 47 is arranged behind the opening/closing door 12 .

The sub-board 41 is connected to the backlight BL. The sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the backlight BL via a drive circuit. The sub-board 41 is connected to the first actuator A1, and the sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the operation of the first actuator A1 via a drive circuit. In this embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the operation of the first actuator A1 to control the operation of the heart movable body 25 corresponding to the specific movable body, thereby controlling the movement of the specific movable body. A function as a means is realized. The sub-board 41 is connected to the second actuator A2. The sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the operation of the second actuator A2 via a drive circuit.

A volume flag is stored in the sub-control RAM 41c. A volume flag is set with a value that can specify a reference volume that serves as a reference. The reference volume may be, for example, the maximum volume or minimum volume that can be output from the speaker 16, or the range of volume that can be output from the speaker 16. FIG. Also, the reference sound volume may be a factor for amplifying the sound volume that is the basis for executing the sound effects. In the present embodiment, the volume flag is set with a value that can specify the volume within the maximum volume range set by the volume adjuster 47 . Note that the volume flags in this embodiment include a first volume flag corresponding to sound effects and character voices, and a second volume flag corresponding to background music. Then, when the volume adjuster 47 is operated, values that can specify the volume within the maximum volume range set by the operation of the volume adjuster 47 are set in the first volume flag and the second volume flag, respectively. .

Next, processing executed by the main control CPU 40a of the main substrate 40 will be described.
When the setting value switch 45 is operated with the start of power supply to the slot machine 10, the main control CPU 40a outputs information that can specify the setting value set by operating the setting value switch 45 (hereinafter referred to as setting value information) is stored in the main control RAM 40c. In addition, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a set value command) that can specify the set set value in the output buffer. The control information (command) stored in the output buffer is output to the sub-board 41 in subsequent interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the main control CPU 40a stores the set value information in the main control RAM 40c based on the operation of changing the set value by operating the set value switch 45 along with the start of power supply. , the function as set value means is realized.

The processing performed by the main control CPU 40a includes game progress main processing.
As shown in FIG. 11, in the game progress main process, the main control CPU 40a performs a game start set process (step S101). In the game start setting process, the main control CPU 40a stores information about the game state of the slot machine 10, and erases or updates the upper part of a predetermined storage area in the main control RAM 40c. Next, the main control CPU 40a starts accepting bets on medals (step S102). Next, the main control CPU 40a checks the gaming state (step S103).

Next, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not it is time for a replay operation (step S104). The time of replay operation corresponds to the time when replay is provided. If it is not the replay operation time (step S104: NO), the main control CPU 40a performs medal management processing for setting the number of bets in the current variation game (step S105). When the number of bets is set in step S105, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a number-of-bets setting command) that can specify that the number of bets has been set in the output buffer. It should be noted that the set bet number can also be specified from the bet amount setting command of the present embodiment. In step S105, when the detection signal from the bet button 18 is input, the main control CPU 40a adds the bet number so that the bet number stored in the main control RAM 40c becomes the specified bet number X, and is subtracted from the credit stored in the main control RAM 40c. Further, in step S105, the main control CPU 40a increases the number of bets by 1 when receiving a detection signal from the insertion sensor SE4. At this time, if the number of bets has reached the prescribed number of bets X, the main control CPU 40a adds 1 to the credits stored in the main control RAM 40c to update the credits. Furthermore, at this time, if the credits have reached the credit upper limit, the main control CPU 40a drives the hopper unit HU and pays out one medal.

The main control CPU 40a determines that the bet number in the current variable game is the stipulated bet number that allows the variable game to start when the replay operation is in progress (step S104: YES) or when the process of step S105 is completed. It is determined whether it matches with X (step S106). When the replay operation is performed (step S104: YES), the main control CPU 40a again sets the bet number in the previous variation game in the main control RAM 40c as the bet number in the current variation game. By the way, even if the number of bets is set, since information that can specify whether it is a replay operation is stored in the main control RAM 40c, by referring to the information, the main control CPU 40a can specify whether it is the replay operation time.

In the present embodiment, the specified bet number X can also be said to be the number of bets required for playing one variation game. In the slot machine 10, the prescribed number of bets X is not different between the bonus game state and the game state other than the bonus game state, and is the same. However, the prescribed number of bets X may differ between the bonus game state and the game state other than the bonus game state. In this case, the bonus game state can also be said to be a game state in which the prescribed number of bets X is different from the game states other than the bonus game state. Also, the bonus game state can be said to be a game state in which the prescribed bet number X is smaller than that in the game states other than the bonus game state. Note that the bonus game state may be a game state in which the prescribed number of bets X is larger than in the game states other than the bonus game state. In this way, when the prescribed bet number X is varied according to the gaming state, the main control CPU 40a performs the processing of step S106 using the prescribed bet number X according to the gaming state.

When the number of bets does not match the specified number of bets X (step S106: NO), the main control CPU 40a proceeds to the process of step S103. That is, in the process of step S106, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the variable game can be started. On the other hand, when the number of bets in the current variable game matches the prescribed number of bets X (step S106: YES), the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the start operation by the start lever 20 has been received (step S107). In the processing of step S107, the main control CPU 40a makes an affirmative determination when an operation signal is input from the start lever 20, and a negative determination when an operation signal is not input from the start lever 20. If the start operation has not been received (step S107: NO), the main control CPU 40a proceeds to the process of step S103. On the other hand, if the start operation has been accepted (step S107: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs game number subtraction processing (step S108). When the start operation is received, the main control CPU 40a stores control information that can specify the start of the variable game (hereinafter referred to as a variable game start command) in the output buffer.

In the game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a performs a first game number subtraction process and a second game number subtraction process. In the game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a performs a first game number subtraction process, and after completing the first game number subtraction process, performs a second game number subtraction process. Then, in the game subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a returns to the game progress main process after finishing the second game number subtraction process.

In the first game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag stored in the main control RAM 40c and determines whether the current effect state is the advantageous effect state. If it is not in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the first game count subtraction process. On the other hand, in the case of the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the remaining number of advantageous stays stored in the main control RAM 40c and updates the result. The number of remaining advantageous stays is the remaining number of times of the variable game that can notify the operation mode of the stop button for deriving the bell stop number in the advantageous effect state, and indicates that the advantageous effect state is changed to the normal effect state. It can also be said to be the number of remaining variable games that can be avoided. After that, the main control CPU 40a ends the first game number subtraction process.

In the second game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag and determines whether the current effect state is the advantageous effect state. If it is not in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the second game count subtraction process. On the other hand, in the case of the advantageous rendering state, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c and updates it. The remaining advantageous upper limit value is a value until the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied. When the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches 0, the advantageous period ending condition is satisfied, and at a predetermined timing thereafter period ends. After that, the main control CPU 40a ends the second game count subtraction process.

After completing the game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a performs a combination lottery process for determining a winning number as a combination lottery (step S109). In the winning lottery process, the main control CPU 40a acquires the value of the winning lottery random number. Further, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the game state flag stored in the main control RAM 40c to identify the current game state. Then, the main control CPU 40a selects a combination lottery table corresponding to the specified gaming state. Then, the main control CPU 40a performs a winning combination lottery by referring to the selected winning combination lottery table based on the value of the acquired combination lottery random number. Specifically, the main control CPU 40a determines the winning numbers to which the acquired winning combination random numbers are distributed. If the value of the random number for the role lottery is not assigned to the winning number that allows the winning of the predetermined symbol combination, the lottery result of the role lottery will be "lost". In this embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs the winning lottery process, thereby realizing the function of the winning lottery means for performing the winning lottery.

In addition, in the combination lottery process, when the bonus flag that can specify that the bonus combination is allowed is not set, and the winning number that allows the bonus combination is won, the bonus A bonus flag corresponding to the type of combination is set. The bonus flags include the first bonus flag set when winning the winning number that allows the winning of the first bonus combination, and the second bonus flag that is set when winning the winning number allowing the winning of the second bonus combination. There are 2 bonus flags and a single bonus flag that is set when winning a winning number that allows winning of a single bonus combination. On the other hand, when the bonus flag is already set (when the winning of the specific bonus combination is carried over), the main control CPU 40a newly sets the bonus flag if the winning number that allows the winning of the bonus combination is won. not set to

In addition, in the role lottery process, the main control CPU 40a stores information that can specify the lottery result of the role lottery (hereinafter referred to as winning information) in the main control RAM 40c. In addition, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as winning information command) that can specify the lottery result of the combination lottery in the output buffer. Also, after storing the winning information command in the output buffer, the main control CPU 40a ends the combination lottery process and returns to the game progress main process.

After completing the winning lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs an advantageous lottery process (step S110). In the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs an advantageous transition lottery process, a ceiling determination process, and an additional lottery process. In the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs the advantageous transition lottery process, and after completing the advantageous transition lottery process, performs the ceiling determination process. Furthermore, in the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs the additional lottery process after finishing the ceiling determination process. Then, in the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a returns to the game progress main process after completing the additional lottery process.

In the advantageous transition lottery process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag and determines whether the current effect state is the normal effect state. If it is not in the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the advantageous transition lottery process. On the other hand, in the case of the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a stores in the main control RAM 40c information that can specify that the transition to the advantageous effect state is permitted (hereinafter referred to as advantageous transition permission information). determine whether Then, when the advantageous shift allowance information is stored in the main control RAM 40c, the main control CPU 40a ends the advantageous shift lottery process. On the other hand, when the advantageous transition allowance information is not stored in the main control RAM 40c, the main control CPU 40a conducts an advantageous transition lottery based on the lottery result of the role lottery. The main control CPU 40a of the present embodiment, for example, acquires the value of the random number generated in the main board 40, refers to a predetermined lottery table based on the value of the acquired random number, and acquires the random number Advantageous transition lottery for deciding whether to permit the transition to the advantageous performance state or not to permit the transition to the advantageous performance state is carried out according to the value of . The probability that it is decided to allow the transition to the advantageous effect state in the advantageous transition lottery differs according to the lottery result of the role lottery. Further, when it is not determined in the advantageous transition lottery that the transition to the advantageous effect state is permitted, the main control CPU 40a ends the advantageous transition lottery process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the advantageous transition lottery that the transition to the advantageous effect state is permitted, the main control CPU 40a stores advantageous transition permission information in the main control RAM 40c. Furthermore, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an advantageous allowable command) that can specify that the transition to the advantageous effect state has been determined in the output buffer, and terminates the advantageous transition lottery process.

In the ceiling determination process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag and determines whether the current effect state is the normal effect state. If it is not in the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the ceiling determination process. On the other hand, in the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a adds 1 to the normal execution count stored in the main control RAM 40c, and updates the normal execution count. The normal execution count corresponds to the number of variable games executed in the normal effect state without being controlled to the advantageous effect state or the bonus effect state. Further, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the number of times of normal execution after updating has reached the ceiling number of times stored in the main control RAM 40c. If the normal execution count has not reached the ceiling count, the main control CPU 40a terminates the ceiling determination process. On the other hand, when the number of normal executions reaches the ceiling number, the main control CPU 40a stores advantageous shift allowance information in the main control RAM 40c. Further, the main control CPU 40a stores the advantageous allowable command in the output buffer, and terminates the ceiling determination process.

In the additional lottery process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag and determines whether the current effect state is the advantageous effect state. If it is not in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the additional lottery process. On the other hand, in the case of the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a performs an additional lottery based on the lottery result of the role lottery. The main control CPU 40a of the present embodiment, for example, acquires the value of the random number generated in the main board 40, refers to a predetermined lottery table based on the value of the acquired random number, and acquires the random number A lottery for adding or not adding is performed according to the value of .

Moreover, in this embodiment, when it is determined to add, the number of times to add (so-called number of times to add) is also determined. The “addition” here means increasing the number of remaining advantageous stays, and increasing the remaining number of variable games that can notify the operation mode of the stop button for deriving the stop number of the bell in the advantageous effect state. , that is, it corresponds to extending the period controlled to the advantageous effect state. The "additional number of times" corresponds to the number of times the remaining number of advantageous stays is increased, that is, the number of times added to the remaining number of advantageous stays. However, if the number of remaining advantageous stays stored in the main control RAM 40c exceeds the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c, the main control CPU 40a determines the additional lottery in the additional lottery process. is not performed, and the addition lottery process is terminated. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the second advantageous effect state is established, it is easier to decide to add an additional lottery in the addition lottery than when the first advantageous effect state is established. That is, in the second advantageous effect state, there are more chances to be added than in the first advantageous effect state, and it can be said to be advantageous. In this embodiment, the first advantageous effect state corresponds to the first specified state, and the second advantageous effect state corresponds to the second specified state. And in this embodiment, the second specific state is more advantageous than the first specific state.

When the addition is determined in the addition lottery, the main control CPU 40a adds the determined number of additions to the remaining number of advantageous stays stored in the main control RAM 40c, and updates the remaining number of advantageous stays. Furthermore, when the main control CPU 40a decides to add, that is, when the number of times of addition is determined, it stores control information that can specify the number of times of addition (hereinafter referred to as a command of the number of times of addition) in the output buffer. End the lottery process.

After finishing the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs instruction information determination process (step S111). In the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a corresponds to the operation order for winning the promoted re-game role when the winning number that allows the winning of the promoted re-game role is won in the role lottery in the preparation effect state. Determine the instruction information to be used. In addition, in the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a determines the operation order for winning the bell role when the winning number that allows the winning of the bell role and the one-piece role is won in the role lottery in the advantageous effect state. determine the corresponding instruction number. Further, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an instruction information command) that can specify the determined instruction information in the output buffer, ends the instruction information determination process, and returns to the game progress main process. The instruction information displayed on the payout display section 37 in this embodiment includes instruction information corresponding to each operation order (pressing order) of the first to sixth pressing order. In addition, in the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag and specifies the current effect state.

After completing the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a performs an instruction information display process (step S112). When the instruction information is determined in the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a controls the payout display section 37 so that the determined instruction information is displayed. If the instruction information is not determined in the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a ends the instruction information display process and returns to the game progress main process.

After finishing the instruction information display process, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the wait time (shortest game time) has elapsed (step S113). If the wait time has not passed (step S113: NO), the main control CPU 40a waits until the wait time passes. If the wait time has passed (step S113: YES), the main control CPU 40a controls the actuators of the reels 13a-13c so that the reels 13a-13c start rotating (step S114). In the slot machine 10, a variable game (game) is started by starting rotation of the reels 13a to 13c in step S114. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable game can be played after the determination result of step S106 in the game progress main process becomes affirmative. That is, in the slot machine 10, variable games (games) can be played on the condition that the number of bets is set. In the process of step S114, the main control CPU 40a waits until the rotation speed of the reels 13a-13c becomes constant at a predetermined rotation speed and the stop operation by the stop buttons 21a-21c can be accepted. When the rotation speed of the reels 13a to 13c becomes constant at a predetermined rotation speed, the main control CPU 40a outputs control information (hereinafter referred to as a stop acceptance command) that can specify that the stop operation can be accepted. Store in the output buffer.

Next, the main control CPU 40a determines whether a stop operation by any of the stop buttons 21a to 21c has been received (step S115). In the processing of step S115, the main control CPU 40a makes an affirmative determination when the detection signal is input from any one of the stop buttons 21a to 21c, while inputting the detection signal from any of the stop buttons 21a to 21c. If not, a negative determination is made. If the stop operation has not been accepted (step S115: NO), the main control CPU 40a waits until the stop operation is accepted.

On the other hand, if a stop operation has been accepted (step S115: YES), the main control CPU 40a executes reel stop processing for stopping rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop button to which the detection signal has been input (step S116). That is, the main control CPU 40a controls the actuator with the stop operation as a trigger, and stops the symbols on the reel corresponding to the stop operation. More specifically, the main control CPU 40a is based on the lottery result of the role lottery and the operation mode (operation order and operation position (operation timing)) of the stop buttons 21a to 21c. ) are searched for symbols that can be stopped on the activated line YL. Then, the main control CPU 40a controls the actuator so that the searched symbol is stopped on the activated line YL. The main control CPU 40a stops the symbol combination corresponding to the winning number and the operation mode of the stop button on the effective line YL by performing such reel stop control regarding the stop operation of the reels 13a to 13c. For example, when the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is a loss and the first bonus flag is set, the main control CPU 40a selects the stop button 21a at the stop operation position capable of deriving the first bonus stop number. 21c are operated, the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that the first bonus combination is won. Further, in the processing of step S116, when the detection signal is input from the stop buttons 21a to 21c, the main control CPU 40a outputs control information (hereinafter referred to as an operation command) capable of specifying the stop button to which the detection signal is input. Store in buffer.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a determines whether all the reels 13a to 13c are stopped (step S117). When some of the reels 13a to 13c are not stopped (step S117: NO), the main control CPU 40a proceeds to the process of step S115. On the other hand, when all the reels 13a to 13c are stopped (step S117: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an additional stagnation process (step S118).

In the addition stagnation process, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not it is decided to add in the addition lottery process of the advantageous lottery process in step S110. If the addition is not decided, the main control CPU 40a ends the addition stagnation process and returns to the game progress main process. On the other hand, when it is decided to add, the main control CPU 40a performs add-on freeze control, ends the add-on stagnation process after the end of the add-on freeze control, and returns to the game progress main process. In the additional freeze control, the main control CPU 40a measures the additional freeze time. When performing the additional freeze control, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an additional freeze start command) that can specify the start of the additional freeze control in the output buffer. Further, in the additional freeze control, the main control CPU 40a waits until the additional freeze time elapses. Then, when the additional freeze time elapses, the main control CPU 40a terminates the additional freeze control. When ending the additional freeze control, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an additional freeze end command) that can specify that the additional freeze control has ended in the output buffer.

After finishing the add-on stagnation control, the main control CPU 40a performs display symbol determination processing for determining symbol combinations stopped on the activated line YL (step S119). In the display symbol determination process, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the symbol combination (role) with a prize on the activated line YL is stopped, and whether the symbol combination (role) with a prize on the activated line YL is stopped. If so, the type of the symbol combination is determined. Then, when the symbol combination for which a prize is determined is stopped, that is, when a winning combination is won, the main control CPU 40a outputs control information (hereinafter referred to as a winning command) capable of specifying the winning combination to the output buffer. store in Further, in step S119, when the symbol combination for which replay is determined as a prize on the activated line YL is stopped, the main control CPU 40a sets the number of bets made in the current variable game as the number of bets again. Then, the re-game is activated (at the time of re-game activation). As a result, the replay is awarded as a prize.

Further, in the process of step S119, when the main control CPU 40a determines that the first bonus combination has been won in the advantageous effect state, "118" is calculated from the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c. Subtract and update the remaining favorable cap value. Further, in the process of step S119, when the main control CPU 40a determines that the second bonus combination has been won in the advantageous effect state, "43" is calculated from the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c. Subtract and update the remaining favorable cap value. If the value to be subtracted (118 or 43) is greater than the remaining advantageous upper limit value, that is, if it is less than 0 when subtracted from the remaining advantageous upper limit value, the main control CPU 40a reduces the remaining advantageous upper limit value. Set to "0 (zero)" and update the remaining advantageous upper limit values.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a determines whether to pay out medals to the player (step S120). In the processing of step S120, the main control CPU 40a makes an affirmative determination when the payout combination has been won, and makes a negative determination when the payout combination has not been won. If medals are to be paid out (step S120: YES), the main control CPU 40a executes medal payout processing (step S121). In the medal payout process, the main control CPU 40a increases the credits stored in the main control RAM 40c by the number of medals to be paid out. At this time, if the credit upper limit (for example, 50) is exceeded, the main control CPU 40a controls the hopper unit HU so that the number of medals exceeding the credit upper limit is paid out. In addition, in the medal payout process, the main control CPU 40a controls the payout display section 37 so that the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the occurrence of winning is displayed. Incidentally, if a symbol combination for which no prize is determined (for example, a missed stopping symbol) is stopped on the pay line YL, no prize is awarded.

When the main control CPU 40a does not pay out medals (step S120: NO), and when the medal payout process (step S121) ends, the main control CPU 40a performs end processing to end one variation game. (step S122). In the ending process, the main control CPU 40a stores control information that can specify the end of the variable game (hereinafter referred to as a variable game end command) in the output buffer. The variable game end command can also specify the presence or absence of winning and the winning combination.

Also, in the end process, the main control CPU 40a performs a game state transition process and an effect state transition process. First, the game state transition processing will be described.
In the game state transition process, the main control CPU 40a updates the value of the game state flag according to the result of the lottery lottery, the current game state, and the symbol combination derived from the variable game (for example, the winning combination). , to shift the game state. The main control CPU 40a refers to the game state flag to identify the current game state. The main control CPU 40a identifies the winning combination based on the result of the display symbol determination process (step S119). When the value of the game state flag is updated, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a game state designation command) indicating a game state that can be specified from the updated value in the output buffer.

Specifically, in the game state transition process, the main control CPU 40a sets a value that can identify the second game state to the game state flag when the promotion replay combination is won in the first game state. Further, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of identifying the first game state to the game state flag when the one-piece combination is won in the second game state. In addition, when the winning number that allows the winning of the first bonus combination is won in the combination lottery, but the first bonus combination is not won, the main control CPU 40a sets the game state flag to a value that can specify the carryover game state. set to In addition, when the winning number allowing the winning of the second bonus combination is won in the combination lottery, but the second bonus combination is not won, the main control CPU 40a sets the carryover game state to a game state flag that can be specified. do. In addition, the main control CPU 40a sets a value that can specify the carryover game state to the game state flag when the first bonus flag is set, and sets the carryover game state to the game state flag when the second bonus flag is set. A identifiable value may be set in the game state flag. Incidentally, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the single bonus flag when the winning number allowing the winning of the single bonus combination is won in the combination lottery, but the single bonus combination is not won.

When the first bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets the game state flag to a value that can specify the first bonus game state. Furthermore, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the first bonus flag. In addition, while the game state flag is set to a value capable of specifying the first bonus game state, that is, while the first bonus game state is in effect, the main control CPU 40a detects the medals paid out in the first bonus game state. count the number of Then, when the number of medals paid out in the first bonus game state exceeds 236, the main control CPU 40a sets the game state flag to a value that can specify the first game state. Further, when the second bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets the game state flag to a value that can specify the second bonus game state. Furthermore, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the second bonus flag. In addition, while the game state flag is set to a value capable of specifying the second bonus game state, that is, while the second bonus game state is in effect, the main control CPU 40a determines the medals paid out in the second bonus game state. count the number of Then, when the number of medals paid out in the second bonus game state exceeds 86, the main control CPU 40a sets the game state flag to a value capable of identifying the first game state. Further, when the single bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets the game state flag to a value that can specify the single bonus game state. Furthermore, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the single bonus flag. Further, after one variation game is executed in the single bonus game state, the main control CPU 40a sets the game state flag to a value that can specify the first game state.

Next, the effect state transition processing will be described.
In the effect state transition process, the main control CPU 40a updates the value of the effect state flag and shifts the effect state. It should be noted that the main control CPU 40a refers to the effect state flag to identify the current effect state.

In the effect state transition process, the main control CPU 40a sets the number of indications in the main control RAM 40c when advantageous transition allowable information is stored in the main control RAM 40c in the normal effect state. For example, 8 times, 12 times, 32 times, and the like are set as the number of precursors. When the number of precursors is 1 or more, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the number of precursors to update the number of precursors. Further, when the number of indications after the update reaches 0, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the preparation effect state to the effect state flag. In this way, when the advantageous shift allowance information is stored and the number of precursors reaches 0, the advantageous allowance condition is established.

In the preparation effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state to the effect state flag when the promotion replay combination wins. At this time, the main control CPU 40a stores "30 times" as the number of remaining advantageous stays in the main control RAM 40c. It should be noted that the number of remaining advantageous stays stored in the main control RAM 40c when transitioning from the preparation effect state to the first advantageous effect state does not have to be a predetermined number of times, for example, the number of times determined by lottery. may be In this way, when the promotion replay combination wins in the preparation effect state, the advantageous start condition is established.

In the first advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a determines whether to shift to the second advantageous effect state when a predetermined winning number (for example, a winning number that allows winning of a cherry role) is won in the role lottery. An advantageous transfer lottery will be held. The main control CPU 40a of the present embodiment, for example, acquires the value of the random number generated in the main board 40, refers to a predetermined lottery table based on the value of the acquired random number, and acquires the random number A second advantageous transition lottery is carried out for determining whether to shift to the second advantageous performance state or not to shift to the second advantageous performance state according to the value of . The probability that the transition to the second advantageous effect state is determined in the second advantageous transition lottery differs according to the lottery result of the role lottery. When it is determined to shift to the second advantageous effect state in the second advantageous transition lottery, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state to the effect state flag. When a value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state is set in the effect state flag, the main control CPU 40a sets the second advantageous stay count corresponding to the number of remaining variable games controlled to the second advantageous effect state as " 10 times” is stored in the main control RAM 40c. On the other hand, if it is not decided to shift to the second advantageous effect state in the second advantageous transition lottery, the main control CPU 40a does not set a value that can specify the second advantageous effect state to the effect state flag. Thus, when it is determined in the first advantageous effect state to shift to the second advantageous effect state in the second advantageous transition lottery, the advantageous promotion condition is established.

In the second advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the second advantageous stay count stored in the main control RAM 40c each time a variation game is performed, and updates the second advantageous stay count. Then, when the second advantageous stay count reaches 0, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state to the effect state flag in the effect state transition process. Thus, when the number of second advantageous stays reaches 0 in the second advantageous effect state, the advantageous demotion condition is established.

In the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a changes the special advantageous effect state when the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c becomes a value smaller than "100". An identifiable value is set in the effect state flag. Thus, when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches "100" in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the special advantageous condition is established.

In the advantageous effect state, when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches "0", the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the normal effect state to the effect state flag. In this way, when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches "0" in the advantageous effect state, the advantageous end condition is established. Further, in the advantageous effect state, when the number of remaining advantageous stays reaches "0", the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the normal effect state to the effect state flag. Thus, when the number of remaining advantageous stays reaches "0" in the advantageous effect state, the advantageous end condition is satisfied. As described above, the advantageous end conditions include an advantageous end condition that is satisfied when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches "0" in an advantageous effect state, and an advantageous end condition that is satisfied when the remaining advantageous stay count reaches "0" in an advantageous effect state. There is an advantageous termination condition that is satisfied when it is reached.

In addition, in this embodiment, the termination condition of the advantageous effect state includes the termination condition that is satisfied when the number of advantageous stays becomes "0" without the advantageous upper limit value being less than "100", and the advantageous upper limit value being " 100" and the advantageous upper limit becomes "0" or the number of advantageous stays becomes "0". In the present embodiment, the termination condition that is met when the number of advantageous stays is "0" without the upper limit of advantage being less than "100" corresponds to the first termination condition. Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition that is satisfied when the advantageous upper limit is less than "100" and the advantageous upper limit is "0" or the number of advantageous stays is "0" is the second end. Equivalent to the condition. As described above, in the present embodiment, there are a first termination condition and a second termination condition as termination conditions for the advantageous effect state corresponding to the specific state. Incidentally, the case where the first end condition is satisfied in the slot machine 10 corresponds to the case where the end condition of the advantageous effect state is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state. Further, the case where the second end condition is satisfied in the slot machine 10 corresponds to the case where the end condition of the advantageous effect state is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state.

The main control CPU 40a determines the internal mode when the value of the effect state flag is updated to a value that can specify the normal effect state. Based on the type of internal mode before transition, the main control CPU 40a determines the internal mode after transition (internal mode after transition). It should be noted that the main control CPU 40a identifies the type of the internal mode before transition from the value of the internal mode flag stored in the main control RAM 40c. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the internal mode before transition is the first internal mode, the main control CPU 40a selects the first internal mode with a probability of 85% and the first internal mode with a probability of 13%. With two internal modes, the third internal mode is determined as the internal mode after transition with a probability of 2%. Further, after determining the internal mode after transition, the main control CPU 40a sets a value that can specify the determined internal mode after transition in the internal mode flag. Further, after determining the internal mode after the shift, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an internal mode command) capable of specifying the internal mode in the output buffer. In this embodiment, the main control CPU 40a updates the value of the internal mode flag to control the internal mode as the internal control state, thereby realizing the function of internal control state means for controlling the internal control state. .

Further, the main control CPU 40a determines the number of ceilings when the value of the effect state flag is updated to a value that can specify the normal effect state. The main control CPU 40a determines the ceiling count based on the type of internal mode after the shift. After determining the range of the number of times to be determined as the ceiling number, the main control CPU 40a determines the ceiling number from the number of times within the range. For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the internal mode after transition is the third internal mode, the main control CPU 40a has a probability of 40% in the range of "1 to 70" and a probability of 60%. Determine the range of the number of times to determine the range of "71 to 128" as the ceiling number of times. At this time, for example, when the range of "71 to 128" is determined, the main control CPU 40a determines the number of peak times within the range of "71 to 128" with equal probability or approximately equal probability. Further, after determining the ceiling number, the main control CPU 40a updates the ceiling number stored in the main control RAM 40c.

When a specific bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the bonus effect state to the effect state flag in the effect state transition process. Specifically, when the first bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets the effect state flag to a value that can specify the first bonus effect state. Further, when the second bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value that can specify the second bonus effect state to the effect state flag.

When the termination condition of the specific bonus game state is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a sets the effect state flag to a value that can specify the effect state before transition to the bonus effect state in principle in the effect state transition process. Specifically, when the condition for ending the first bonus game state is established, the main control CPU 40a sets the effect state flag to a value capable of specifying the effect state before shifting to the first bonus effect state. Further, when the condition for ending the second bonus game state is established, the main control CPU 40a sets the effect state flag to a value capable of specifying the effect state before shifting to the second bonus effect state. However, when the end condition of the specific bonus game state is established, if the remaining advantageous upper limit value is greater than "0" and smaller than "100", the effect state before transition to the bonus effect state is the first. Even in the advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets the effect state flag to a value capable of specifying the special advantageous effect state. Furthermore, when the termination condition of the specific bonus game state is satisfied, if the remaining advantageous upper limit value has reached "0", even if the effect state before the transition to the bonus effect state is the advantageous effect state, the main The control CPU 40a sets the effect state flag to a value that can specify the normal effect state. In this case, the main control CPU 40a determines the internal mode after the shift and the ceiling count. Then, the main control CPU 40a updates the "internal mode flag value" and the "ceiling count" stored in the main control RAM 40c.

As shown in FIG. 11, after completing the termination process, the main control CPU 40a performs a special stagnation process (step S123). Note that specific control in the special stagnation process will be described later. Then, after finishing the process of step S123, the main control CPU 40a finishes the game progress main process relating to the execution of one variation game, and returns to the process of step S101 again. As described above, in the slot machine 10, rotation of all the reels is started in response to the start operation, and rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the stop operation.

In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a may perform settlement processing in addition to the game progress main processing. The main control CPU 40a performs settlement processing when a detection signal is input from the settlement button 19 as a trigger. It should be noted that the main control CPU 40a does not perform settlement processing even if a detection signal is input from the settlement button 19 during the period during which the processing of steps S108 to S123 is performed in the game progress main processing. That is, the period during which the settlement process can be performed (hereinafter referred to as the settlement process possible period) is within the period during which the main control CPU 40a performs the processes of steps S101 to S107 in the game progress main process. Thus, in the present embodiment, settlement processing corresponding to settlement control is performed on the condition that the settlement button 19 as settlement operation means is operated.

In the settlement process enabled period, the main control CPU 40a performs settlement processing when the detection signal from the settlement button 19 is input when the credit is 1 or more (that is, when there is credit). Also, during the settlement processing possible period, the main control CPU 40a inputs a detection signal from the settlement button 19 when the number of bets is 1 or more even when the credit is 0 (that is, when there is no credit). Triggered by the event, the settlement process is performed. However, when the number of bets here is 1 or more, it is premised that the number of bets is not set when a replay is awarded. It should be noted that even when the number of bets is 1 or more after the replay is awarded, if the credit is 1 or more, the main control CPU 40a receives a detection signal from the settlement button 19 as a trigger, Carry out settlement processing.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more within the settlement process possible period. Further, in the slot machine 10, if the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 0 within the settlement processing possible period, the settlement processing is performed. Further, in the slot machine 10, if the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 0 and the number of bets is 1 or more within the settlement processing possible period, the settlement processing is performed. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, when the credit is 0 and the number of bets is 0 even within the settlement process possible period, the settlement process is not performed even if the settlement button 19 is operated.

In the settlement process, when the number of credits stored in the main control RAM 40c is 1 or more, the main control CPU 40a controls the hopper unit HU to pay out (settle) the number of medals stored as the credit. do. Further, in the settlement process, the main control CPU 40a pays out (settles) the number of medals set as the number of bets when the number of bets is 1 or more, and not during replay operation. to control. However, when the replay is activated, the main control CPU 40a does not control the hopper unit HU to pay out the number of medals set as the number of bets. The hopper unit HU is controlled so that only the number of medals stored as is paid out. In this way, the number of medals set as the number of bets is not settled during the replay operation. Also, when performing the settlement process, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as settlement command) that can specify that the settlement process is to be performed in the output buffer. The settlement process in this embodiment corresponds to settlement control. In this embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs the settlement process, thereby realizing the function of the settlement control means for controlling the settlement.

Next, processing executed by the sub-control CPU 41a of the sub-board 41 will be described.
When a setting value command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a specifies a setting value that can be specified from the setting value command. Then, the sub-control CPU 41a stores setting value information that can specify the specified setting value in the sub-control RAM 41c.

When the game state command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a updates the game state information stored in the sub-control RAM 41c. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a updates the game state information to indicate a game state that can be specified from the game state command. The game state indicated by the game state information corresponds to a game state that can be specified from the game state information.

When the effect state command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a updates the effect state information stored in the sub-control RAM 41c. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a updates the effect state information indicating the effect state that can be specified from the effect state command. The rendering state indicated by the rendering state information corresponds to a rendering state that can be specified from the rendering state information.

When the sub-control CPU 41a receives a bet number setting command, it controls the effect state to be specified from the effect state information. By the way, after the replay combination is won, when the sub-control CPU 41a inputs the variable game start command, it controls to the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect state after the change when the type of the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information is changed. On the other hand, the sub-control CPU 41a continues to control the effect state under control when the type of the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information has not been changed. For example, when the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information is changed to the normal effect state, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the background image in the normal effect state is displayed. Control to the production state. In addition, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the decoration lamp 15 to emit light in the luminous color in the normal effect state, or controls the speaker 16 to output the background music in the normal effect state. Control to the production state. In this embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 to display the background image in the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information, thereby controlling the effect state as the effect mode. A function as control effect mode control means is realized.

The sub-control CPU 41a counts the number of medals increased from before the start of the first bonus game state to the end of the first bonus game state, and stores the number in the sub-control RAM 41c as first bonus acquisition information. Remember. In the case of the first bonus game state, the sub-control CPU 41a specifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning command, adds the specified number to a value that can be specified from the acquisition information during the first bonus, 1 Update the acquisition information during the bonus. In addition, in the first bonus gaming state, when a bet amount setting command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a sets the bet amount specified by the bet amount setting command from a value that can be specified from the information acquired during the first bonus. Subtract and update the acquisition information during the first bonus. The sub-control CPU 41a initializes the acquired information during the first bonus upon input of a variable game start command (execution of the next variable game) after the end of the first bonus game state. .

The sub-control CPU 41a counts the number of medals increased from before the start of the second bonus game state to the end of the second bonus game state, and stores the number in the sub-control RAM 41c as information obtained during the second bonus. Remember. In the case of the second bonus game state, the sub-control CPU 41a specifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning command, adds the specified number to a value that can be specified from the acquisition information during the second bonus, 2 Update the acquisition information during the bonus. In addition, in the second bonus gaming state, when a bet amount setting command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a sets the bet amount specified by the bet amount setting command from a value that can be specified from the information obtained during the second bonus. Subtract, and update the acquisition information during the second bonus. Note that the sub-control CPU 41a initializes the obtained information during the second bonus when the variation game start command is input (the next variation game is executed) after the second bonus game state is finished. .

The sub-control CPU 41a counts the number of medals acquired after the start of the advantageous period (number of sheets), and stores the number in the sub-control RAM 41c as advantageous period acquisition information. If it is an advantageous period, that is, if it is in a bonus game state (bonus effect state) or an advantageous effect state, the sub-control CPU 41a specifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning command, and uses the specified number as an advantage. Add to the value that can be specified from the period acquisition information, and update the advantageous period acquisition information. Further, in the case of the advantageous period, when the sub-control CPU 41a receives a bet amount setting command, the sub-control CPU 41a subtracts the bet amount specified from the bet amount setting command from the value that can be specified from the advantageous period acquisition information. Update acquisition information. The sub-control CPU 41a, after the advantageous period ends and being controlled to the normal effect state, inputs the variable game start command (executes the next variable game) as a trigger, the advantageous period acquisition information to initialize.

Incidentally, when the winning of the replay combination can be specified from the winning command, the sub-control CPU 41a does not update the advantageous period acquisition information. Further, even in the case where the replay combination can be won in the first bonus game state, if the winning of the replay combination can be specified from the winning command, the sub-control CPU 41a determines whether the replay combination is in the first bonus state. Do not update acquisition information. Similarly, even in the case where the replay combination can be won in the second bonus game state, if the winning of the replay combination can be specified from the winning command, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the second bonus. Do not update medium acquisition information.

When receiving the internal mode command, the sub-control CPU 41a updates the internal mode information stored in the sub-control RAM 41c. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a updates the internal mode information to indicate an internal mode that can be specified from the internal mode command. The internal mode indicated by the internal mode information corresponds to an internal mode that can be specified from the internal mode information.

When the instruction information command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a performs a navigation effect process in which a navigation effect is executed. The sub-control CPU 41a performs navigation effect processing based on the winning number that can be specified from the winning information command and the instruction information that can be specified from the instruction information command. In the navigation effect processing, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to execute the navigation effect that notifies the operation mode of the stop button based on the instruction information that can be specified from the instruction information command.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the navigation effect includes a navigation effect in which normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 are displayed on the effect display device . For example, if the instruction information identifiable from the instruction information command is instruction information corresponding to the fourth pressing order, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the navigation effect informing the fourth pressing order is executed. Control. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the normal navigation image Na1 having "1" in the display area corresponding to the middle reel 13b, the normal navigation image Na2 having "2" in the display area corresponding to the right reel 13c, and the left reel. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the normal navigation image Na3 having "3" is displayed in the display area corresponding to 13a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the navigation effect includes a Bel-navi effect in which the effect display device 14 displays Bel-navi images Nb1 to Nb3 different from the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3. The bell navigation effect is a navigation effect that is executed only when winning of the role of bell is permitted. For example, if the instruction information that can be specified from the instruction information command is instruction information corresponding to the fourth pressing order, and if it is possible to specify from the winning information command that the winning number that allows the winning of the bell role has been won, The sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the bell navi effect that informs the fourth pressing order is executed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the Bel-navi image Nb1 having "1" in the display area corresponding to the middle reel 13b, the Bel-navi image Nb2 having "2" in the display area corresponding to the right reel 13c, and the left reel 13a. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the Bel-Navi image Nb3 having "3" is displayed in the corresponding display area.

The sub-control CPU 41a may execute an add-on suggesting effect suggesting that an add-on will be performed when an advantageous effect state is generated. The add-on suggestion effect is executed by the action of the star movable body 26. - 特許庁The add-on suggesting performance is executed when execution of the add-on suggesting performance is determined in the execution lottery for the add-on suggesting performance performed when the advantageous performance state is generated. The sub-control CPU 41a, after inputting the stop reception command when in the advantageous effect state, performs a lottery for execution of the add-on suggestion effect. The sub-control CPU 41a, when inputting the number-of-additions command, determines execution of the addition-suggestion performance with a higher probability than when not inputting the number-of-additions command. For this reason, when the star movable body 26 operates, the sense of anticipation for the addition is heightened. When the execution of the additional suggesting effect is determined, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the second actuator A2 to operate the star movable body 26 to execute the additional suggesting effect.

The sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the additional effect is executed when the additional freeze start command is input. In the addition effect, the sub-control CPU 41a specifies the number of times of addition from the command of the number of times of addition, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the addition effect of notifying the number of times of addition is executed.

When a settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a performs a settlement effect execution process for executing a settlement effect related to the settlement of medals (game media). In the settlement effect execution process, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the settlement effect image SG indicating that the medals are to be settled is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the settlement effect image SG is an image including characters (character information) "under settlement". That is, the settlement effect has a content of displaying characters (character image) of "under settlement". The sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the settlement effect image SG is displayed for the execution time of the settlement effect (for example, 5 seconds). Thus, the settlement effect in the present embodiment is executed by displaying the settlement effect image SG on the effect display device 14 . In the present embodiment, the effect display device 14 corresponds to effect execution means for executing a settlement effect related to settlement of game media. In addition, in the settlement effect execution process, the sub-control CPU 41a may be configured to control the decoration lamp 15 so as to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the settlement effect. Further, in the settlement performance execution process, the sub-control CPU 41a may be configured to control the speaker 16 so as to output sound effects corresponding to the settlement performance. In this case, it can be said that the decorative lamp 15 and the speaker 16 also correspond to an effect executing means for executing a settlement effect related to the settlement of game media.

After completing the settlement effect execution process, the sub-control CPU 41a performs a return attention calling process for executing a attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. In the return attention calling process, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention calling image GTx is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), the warning image GTx is displayed as "Be careful not to forget to take out your prepaid card. ] is an image containing characters (character information). In other words, the warning regarding the return of the storage medium is "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card. ] (character information) is displayed. The sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention calling image GTx is displayed for the execution time (for example, 5 seconds) of the attention regarding the return of the storage medium. As described above, in the present embodiment, a warning regarding the return of the storage medium is executed by displaying the warning image GTx on the effect display device 14 . In the present embodiment, the effect display device 14 corresponds to effect execution means for executing a call for attention regarding the return of the storage medium. In the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 as the effect executing means, thereby realizing the function as the effect control means.

In addition, the sub-control CPU 41a may be configured to control the decoration lamp 15 so as to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium in the return attention call process. In addition, the sub-control CPU 41a may be configured to control the speaker 16 so as to output a sound effect corresponding to the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium in the return attention call process. In this case, it can be said that the decoration lamp 15 and the speaker 16 also correspond to the effect executing means for executing the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. Further, in this case, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14, the decorative lamp 15 and the speaker 16 as the effect executing means, thereby realizing the function as the effect control means.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, after the settlement performance regarding the return of the game medium is executed, the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. In other words, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the settlement performance regarding the return of the game medium is executed before the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. .

After the end of the return attention calling process, the sub-control CPU 41a performs a waiting effect execution process for executing a waiting effect. However, when the replay is given, the sub-control CPU 41a does not perform the standby effect execution process even after the return attention calling process ends. That is, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the sub-control CPU 41a performs the standby effect execution process when the re-game is not given, while the sub-control CPU 41a performs the standby effect execution process when the re-game is given. The control CPU 41a does not perform the standby effect execution process. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the waiting effect is not executed after the replay combination is won, that is, during the replay operation. The specific content of the standby effect will be explained later.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the standby effect is executed after the settlement effect for returning the game medium is executed. In addition, in the slot machine 10, when settlement processing is performed by operating the settlement button 19, a standby effect is executed after calling attention regarding the return of the storage medium. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, after the settlement performance regarding the return of the game medium is executed, the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. After that, a standby effect is executed. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, after the settlement effect for returning the game medium is executed and before the standby effect is executed. Then, a warning regarding the return of the storage medium is executed.

As described above, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 1 or more in the slot machine 10 within the settlement process possible period. . The settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 0. Further, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 0 and the number of bets is 1 or more. That is, the settlement process is executed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more, and when the settlement button 19 is operated when the number of bets is 1 or more. However, the settlement process is not performed when the credit is 0, the replay combination is given and the number of bets is 1 or more.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more, it can be said that the condition for starting execution of the standby effect is met. However, since the waiting effect execution processing is not performed when the replay is provided, the replay is not performed even if the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more in the slot machine 10. When it is provided, the execution start condition of the standby performance is not established, and the standby performance is not executed.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the number of bets is 1 or more, it can be said that the condition for starting execution of the standby effect is met. However, since the waiting effect execution process is not performed when the replay is provided, even if the settlement button 19 is operated when the number of bets is 1 or more, the replay can be performed. is provided, the execution start condition of the standby performance is not established, and the standby performance is not executed.

Further, as described above, when the credit is 0 and the number of bets is 0, even if the settlement button 19 is operated, settlement processing is not performed. Therefore, when the credit is 0 and the number of bets is 0, even if the adjustment button 19 is operated, the operation of the adjustment button 19 is triggered and the standby effect is not executed. Thus, in this embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated when the credit is 0 and the number of bets is 0, the effect executing means is triggered by the operation of the settlement operation means. As a standby production is not executed.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the standby time elapses without resetting the measurement after the measurement of the standby time is started, the conditions for starting execution of the standby effect may be established. However, even in this case, when the replay is given, the execution start condition of the standby effect is not established, and the standby effect is not executed.

Specifically, when the variable game end command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the waiting time (for example, 45 seconds). When the standby time has elapsed since the measurement of the standby time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a performs the standby effect execution process. In the standby effect execution process, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that a logo effect, various attention calls, and a character effect, which will be described later, are executed. Note that logo effects, various alerts, and character effects that are executed during execution of the standby effects will be described later. Further, in the standby effect execution process, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control to make the reels 13a to 13c difficult to visually recognize. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed at least in the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14. FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a executes the special visual control, thereby realizing the function as the special visual control means for executing the special visual control.

However, when the replay is provided, the sub-control CPU 41a does not perform the waiting effect execution process even if the waiting time has passed. Further, when the sub-control CPU 41a receives a detection signal from the menu button MB during measurement of the standby time, it stops measuring the standby time. When the detection signal is input from the menu button MB after stopping the measurement of the waiting time, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the waiting time. Thus, in this embodiment, the measurement of the standby time is reset by operating the menu button MB. Further, when the sub-control CPU 41a receives a bet number command while measuring the waiting time, it stops measuring the waiting time.

As described above, the conditions for starting execution of the standby effect in the slot machine 10 are the condition that is met when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more, and the condition when the settlement button 19 is operated when the bet number is 1 or more. There is a condition that is satisfied when the standby time is measured, and a condition that is satisfied when the standby time elapses without resetting the measurement after the measurement of the standby time is started. However, when the replay is provided, the conditions for starting execution of the standby effect are not established.

Here, the standby effect will be described.
The standby effect in this embodiment includes a logo effect, various alerts, and a character effect. In the slot machine 10, after the logo effect is executed, various alerts are executed, and then the character effect is executed. The various types of alerts that are executed in the standby effect include alerts about goto acts, alerts about hitting game machines, alerts about addiction, alerts about leaving in cars, and alerts about playing games under the age of 18. , and a warning about the sale of malicious strategies. Although the details will be described later, the standby effect is repeatedly executed until the condition for interrupting the standby effect is satisfied. Therefore, when the condition for interrupting the standby effect is not satisfied, the logo effect in the standby effect is executed again after the character effect in the standby effect is executed.

Below, based on FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d) and FIGS. 16(a) to 16(d), display contents of the effect display device 14 when the standby effect is executed will be described. In addition, when the standby effect is executed, the backlight BL is extinguished. Further, when the standby effect is executed, an image of one color (for example, white) is displayed in the transmissive area 14 a of the effect display device 14 .

As shown in FIG. 15(a), when the execution of the standby effect is started, the effect display device 14 executes the logo effect. The logo effect may be, for example, an effect of displaying the logo mark of the company that manufactured the gaming machine, or an effect of displaying the motto of the company that manufactured the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), after the logo effect is finished, the effect display device 14 calls attention to the goto action. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays item images TK1 to TK6 indicating items for calling attention. Among the item images TK1 to TK6, the item image TK1 corresponding to the call for attention regarding the goto action is displayed on the effect display device 14 in a larger size than the other item images TK2 to TK6. A warning image GT1 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a warning regarding the goto action is executed. The alert image GT1 is "Goto act is a crime". ] is an image containing characters (character information). In other words, the content of the warning regarding the act of goto that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is, "Goto act is a 'crime'." ] (character information) is displayed. Thus, in the effect display device 14, during the execution of the standby effect, attention to the goto action is executed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image GT1 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel when viewed from the front. The lateral width of one reel corresponds to the lateral width of one of the reels 13a to 13c in the circumferential direction.

Further, the alert image GT1 is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area where the attention calling image GT1 is displayed is a different display area from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. In addition, the display area where the alert image GT1 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. As described above, the display area where the alert image GT1 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15(c), after the end of the call for attention regarding the goto action, the effect display device 14 executes the call for attention regarding hitting the game machine. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays item images TK1 to TK6. In the effect display device 14, among the item images TK1 to TK6, the item image TK2 corresponding to calling attention to hitting the game machine is displayed larger than the other item images TK1, TK3 to TK6. Then, the attention calling image GT2 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding hitting the game machine is executed. The alert image GT2 is ``Please treat the table ``gently and carefully''. ] is an image containing characters (character information). In other words, the content of the warning about hitting the game machine during the execution of the standby effect is "Please touch the machine 'gently and carefully'." ] (character information) is displayed. In this manner, the effect display device 14 calls attention to hitting the game machine during execution of the standby effect. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image GT2 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Also, the alert image GT2 is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area where the attention calling image GT2 is displayed is a different display area from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. In addition, the display area where the alert image GT2 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. As described above, the display area where the alert image GT2 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15(d), after the end of the call for attention regarding hitting the game machine, the effect display device 14 executes the call for attention regarding immersion. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays item images TK1 to TK6. Among the item images TK1 to TK6, the item image TK3 corresponding to the call for attention regarding immersion is displayed in the effect display device 14 larger than the other item images TK1, TK2, TK4 to TK6. A warning image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a warning regarding the immersion is executed. The alert image GT3 is "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed moderately. ] (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). In other words, the content of the alert regarding immersion during the execution of the standby effect is "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game that is moderately enjoyed." ] (character information) is displayed. In addition, the content of the alert regarding immersion that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is "Be careful of immersion. ] (character information) is displayed. In this manner, the effect display device 14 calls attention to the immersion during execution of the standby effect. In this embodiment, "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play. ” (character information) corresponds to the first character information, and “Be careful not to get addicted. ] (character information) corresponds to the second character information. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the caution image GT3 corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image GT3 is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image GT3 is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the attention image GT3 is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display that is different from the reel visual recognition area, thereby executing attention about immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image GT3 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the display area where the alert image GT3 is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image GT3 in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area where the alert image GT3 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

As shown in FIG. 16( a ), after the end of the attention regarding the immersion, the effect display device 14 executes the attention regarding leaving in the car. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays item images TK1 to TK6. In the effect display device 14, among the item images TK1-TK6, the item image TK4 corresponding to calling attention to leaving in the car is displayed larger than the other item images TK1-TK3, TK5, TK6. Then, a warning image GT4 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a warning regarding leaving in the car is executed. The warning image GT4 is "Leaving in the car is 'child abuse'." ] is an image containing characters (character information). In other words, the content of the warning about being left in the car that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is, "Leaving in the car is 'child abuse.' ] (character information) is displayed. In this manner, the effect display device 14 calls attention to leaving in the car during execution of the standby effect. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image GT4 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Further, the attention calling image GT4 is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image GT4 is displayed is a different display area from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. In addition, the display area where the alert image GT4 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. As described above, the display area where the alert image GT4 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), after the end of the call for attention regarding leaving in the car, the effect display device 14 executes a call for attention regarding playing a game under the age of 18 years old. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays item images TK1 to TK6. In the effect display device 14, among the item images TK1 to TK6, the item image TK5 corresponding to calling attention to playing games under the age of 18 is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 to TK4 and TK6. A warning image GT5 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a warning regarding playing a game under the age of 18 is executed. The alert image GT5 is "Pachinko/Pachislot after turning '18'." ] is an image containing characters (character information). In other words, the content of the warning about playing games under the age of 18, which is executed during the execution of the standby effect, is "Pachinko/Pachislot after turning '18'." ] (character information) is displayed. In this manner, the effect display device 14 calls attention to playing a game under the age of 18 during execution of the standby effect. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image GT5 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Also, the attention-calling image GT5 is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area where the attention-calling image GT5 is displayed is a different display area from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. In addition, the display area where the alert image GT5 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. As described above, the display area where the alert image GT5 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), after the end of the call for attention regarding playing games under the age of 18, the effect display device 14 executes the call for attention regarding the sale of malicious strategies. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays item images TK1 to TK6. In the effect display device 14, among the item images TK1 to TK6, the item image TK6 corresponding to the call for attention regarding the sale of malicious strategies is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 to TK5. Then, a warning image GT6 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a warning regarding the sale of malicious strategies is executed. The alert image GT6 is "Beware of 'sweet temptation'. ] is an image containing characters (character information). In other words, the content of the alert regarding the sale of malicious strategies that are executed during the execution of the standby production is, "Beware of 'sweet temptation'. ] (character information) is displayed. In this manner, the effect display device 14 calls attention to the sale of malicious strategies during execution of the standby effect. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image GT6 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Further, the alert image GT6 is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area where the attention-calling image GT6 is displayed is a different display area from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. In addition, the display area where the alert image GT6 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. As described above, the display area where the alert image GT6 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), character effects are executed on the effect display device 14 after the end of calling attention to the sale of malicious strategies. The character presentation may be, for example, presentation of presentation contents introducing a character serving as a motif of the slot machine 10 or presentation of presentation contents explaining the presentation executed in the slot machine 10 .

When the character effect is being executed, the effect display device 14 executes the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB corresponding to the predetermined operating means. When an effect related to the operation of the menu button MB is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image GMx. The image GMx is an image that includes characters (character information) indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB. . That is, in the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB, it is notified that the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the presentation related to the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is notified that the volume can be adjusted by operating the predetermined operation means. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the image GMx is longer than the horizontal width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Also, the image GMx is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. In other words, the display area where the image GMx is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. In addition, the display area where the image GMx is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. As described above, the display area where the image GMx is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14 a and is an area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25 .

As described above, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the waiting effect, the effect regarding the operation of the menu button MB is executed after the call for attention regarding the immersion is executed. That is, during execution of the standby effect, the effect display device 14 executes an effect related to the operation of the menu button MB as the predetermined operating means after executing a call for attention regarding the immersion.

Here, a case where the menu button MB is operated will be described.
In this embodiment, when the menu button MB corresponding to the predetermined operating means is operated during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the standby effect ends. For example, during execution of the standby effect, when the attention image GT3 is displayed to call attention to the immersion, and the menu button MB is operated, the execution of the standby effect ends and the attention to the immersion is called. Execution ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the menu button MB corresponding to the predetermined operation means is operated while the attention is being called for the immersion during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the attention for the immersion is terminated. do.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the menu button MB is operated while the variable game is not being executed, the effect display device 14 displays a menu. When the menu is displayed on the effect display device 14, the effect display device 14 displays item images KM1 and KM2 that can specify the items. The first item image KM1 is an item image that can specify an item related to volume customization (item related to volume adjustment). The second item image KM2 is an item image that can specify an item (item related to explanation of effect) related to the effect executed in the gaming machine.

Also, when the menu is displayed on the effect display device 14, a selection image SS pointing to the item being selected is displayed. The selected image SS is an image imitating an arrow. The selected image SS is displayed in one of the display mode for pointing the first item image KM1 (the display mode shown in FIG. 17A) and the display mode for pointing the second item image KM2 (the display mode in FIG. 17B). is displayed in the display mode shown in ). When the right button SBb is operated while the selection image SS is displayed pointing to the first item image KM1 as shown in FIG. 17(a), as shown in FIG. 17(b) The selection image SS is displayed in a display mode pointing to the second item image KM2. Similarly, when the left button SBd is operated while the selection image SS is displayed pointing to the second item image KM2 as shown in FIG. , the selection image SS is displayed in a display mode pointing to the first item image KM1.

As shown in FIG. 17C, when the selection image SS is displayed in a display mode pointing to the first item image KM1, that is, when an item related to volume customization is selected, the decision button SBe is operated. If so, the display content of the effect display device 14 will be the display content related to volume adjustment. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays a first meter Ma and a second meter Mb.

The slot machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that the character voice volume can be adjusted in four levels. The first meter Ma includes four graduations Ma1-Ma4. The first meter Ma is displayed in a mode corresponding to the stage set as the volume of the character voice. For example, when the volume of the set character voice is the third level from the minimum volume, as shown in FIG. A first meter Ma is displayed.

In the slot machine 10, when the first meter Ma is displayed, the sound volume of the character voice can be adjusted by operating the upper button SBa and the lower button SBc. When the first meter Ma is displayed, an up-and-down operation prompting image Sac modeled after the up button SBa and the down button SBc is displayed in the vicinity of the display area where the first meter Ma is displayed. In a situation where the volume of the character voice can be adjusted, if the volume of the character voice has not reached the maximum volume within the range in which the volume of the character voice can be adjusted, the volume of the character voice is increased by one step when the upper button SBa is operated. can be done. In addition, when the volume of the character voice can be adjusted and the minimum volume is not reached within the range in which the volume of the character voice can be adjusted, when the down button SBc is operated, the volume of the character voice is lowered by one step. can be made When the volume of the character voice is adjusted by operating the upper button SBa or the lower button SBc, the colored scale of the first meter Ma (mode of the first meter Ma) changes along with the adjustment.

The slot machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that the volume of the background music can be adjusted in four levels. The second meter Mb includes four graduations Mb1-Mb4. The second meter Mb is displayed in a manner corresponding to the stage set as the background music volume. For example, when the volume of the background music that has been set is the second level from the minimum volume, as shown in FIG. A second meter Mb is displayed.

The slot machine 10 is configured so that the volume of the background music can be adjusted by operating the right button SBb and the left button SBd when the second meter Mb is displayed. Then, when the second meter Mb is displayed, a left/right operation prompting image Sbd imitating the right button SBb and the left button SBd is displayed near the display area where the second meter Mb is displayed. In a situation where the background music volume can be adjusted, if the background music volume does not reach the maximum volume within the adjustable range, the background music volume is increased by one step when the right button SBb is operated. can be done. When the background music volume is adjustable and the background music volume is not at the minimum volume within the adjustable range, the left button SBd is operated to lower the background music volume by one level. can be made When the volume of the background music is adjusted by operating the right button SBb or the left button SBd, the colored scale of the second meter Mb (mode of the second meter Mb) changes along with the adjustment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(d), when the selection image SS is displayed in a display mode pointing to the second item image KM2, that is, when an item related to the effect executed in the game machine is selected. When the enter button SBe is operated, the effect display device 14 displays the effect explanation. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays a first explanatory image PG1, a second explanatory image PG2, and a third explanatory image PG3.

The first explanatory image PG1 is "Extremely hot when the star movable body moves!" (character information), and corresponds to an image explaining that the degree of expectation to be added when the star movable body 26 operates is high. The second explanation image PG2 is an image including characters (character information) of "If you follow the navigation during the advantageous effect state, ◯". This corresponds to an image explaining that there is no problem by operating .about.21c. The third explanatory image PG3 is an image including characters (character information) of ``volume can be adjusted from the menu screen'', and is an image explaining that the volume can be adjusted after the menu is displayed by operating the menu button MB. corresponds to

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the menu button MB is displayed while the menu is displayed on the effect display device 14, the display of the menu is finished, and the effect display device 14 shows the effect state during stay. A background image is displayed. In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the menu button MB is displayed when the effect display device 14 has display contents related to volume adjustment, the display of the menu is terminated, and the effect display device 14 corresponds to the effect state during stay. background image is displayed. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the menu button MB is displayed when the effect display device 14 displays the display contents related to the effect explanation, the display of the menu ends, and the effect display device 14 changes to the staying effect state. A corresponding background image is displayed.

Next, control related to menus will be described.
When the detection signal is input from the menu button MB while the variable game is not being executed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the menu is displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first item image KM1, the second item image KM2, and the selection image SS are displayed. Note that the time when the variable game is not being executed here corresponds to the period before the variable game start command is input and the period after the variable game end command is input.

Further, when the menu is displayed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the selection image SS is displayed in a display mode pointing to the first item image KM1. When the menu is displayed and the selection image SS is displayed in the display mode pointing to the first item image KM1, the sub-control CPU 41a receives the detection signal from the right button SBb, The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the selection image SS is displayed in a display mode pointing to the 2-item image KM2. On the other hand, when the menu is displayed and the selection image SS is displayed in the display mode pointing to the second item image KM2, the sub-control CPU 41a receives a detection signal from the left button SBd. , the effect display device 14 is controlled so that the selection image SS is displayed in a display mode pointing to the first item image KM1. By the way, when the menu is displayed, the sub-control CPU 41a terminates the display of the menu when the detection signal from the menu button MB is input, and controls to the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information. Then, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time.

When a detection signal is input from the enter button SBe when an item related to volume adjustment is selected, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display contents related to volume adjustment are displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first meter Ma, the second meter Mb, the up-down operation promotion image Sac, and the left-right operation promotion image Sbd are displayed. Incidentally, when the display content of the effect display device 14 is controlled to display content related to volume adjustment, the sub-control CPU 41a terminates the display of the display content related to volume adjustment when a detection signal is input from the menu button MB. , control to an effect state that can be specified from the effect state information. Then, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time.

When the display contents related to volume adjustment are controlled, the sub-control CPU 41a stores in the sub-control RAM 41c when a detection signal is input from the upper button SBa or when a detection signal is input from the lower button SBc. may update the value of the first volume flag that has been set. Specifically, when the detection signal from the upper button SBa is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines that the volume identifiable from the first volume flag is 1 when the volume identifiable from the value of the first volume flag is not the maximum volume. Update the value of the first volume flag to a stepped-up value. Even when the detection signal from the upper button SBa is input, if the volume that can be specified from the value of the first volume flag reaches the maximum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a detects the value of the first volume flag. do not update. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the down button SBc is input, if the volume that can be specified from the value of the first volume flag is not the minimum volume, the volume that can be specified from the first volume flag is lowered by one step. Update the value of the first volume flag to the value that Note that even when the detection signal from the down button SBc is input, if the volume that can be specified from the value of the first volume flag reaches the minimum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a changes the value of the first volume flag do not update.

On the other hand, when controlling to display content related to volume adjustment, the sub-control CPU 41a receives a detection signal from the right button SBb or receives a detection signal from the left button SBd, and displays the sub-control RAM 41c. may update the value of the second volume flag stored in . Specifically, when the detection signal from the right button SBb is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines that the volume identifiable from the second volume flag is 1 when the volume identifiable from the value of the second volume flag is not the maximum volume. Update the value of the second volume flag to a stepped-up value. Note that even when the detection signal from the right button SBb is input, if the volume that can be specified from the value of the second volume flag reaches the maximum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a changes the value of the second volume flag do not update. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the left button SBd is input, the secondary control CPU 41a decreases the volume identifiable from the second volume flag by one step when the volume identifiable from the value of the second volume flag is not the minimum volume. Update the value of the second volume flag to the value that Even when the detection signal from the left button SBd is input, if the volume that can be specified from the value of the second volume flag reaches the minimum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a do not update.

When a detection signal is input from the enter button SBe when an item related to explanation of effect is selected, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display contents related to explanation of effect are displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first explanatory image PG1, the second explanatory image PG2, and the third explanatory image PG3 are displayed. By the way, when the display content of the effect display device 14 is controlled to be the display content related to the effect explanation, the sub-control CPU 41a terminates the display of the display content related to the effect explanation when the detection signal from the menu button MB is input. , control to an effect state that can be specified from the effect state information. Then, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time.

Here, based on FIG. 18, the special stagnation process (step S123) in the game progress main process will be described.
In the specific stagnation process, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the first bonus effect state has ended (step S201). In step S201, the main control CPU 40a determines in the end processing (step S122) whether the end condition of the first bonus game state is established and the effect state flag is set to a value that can specify the effect state other than the bonus effect state. judge. Determining that the first bonus effect state has ended in step S201 corresponds to determining that the final variation game in the first bonus game state has ended.

When the first bonus effect state ends (step S201: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the first stagnation start command (step S202). In the process of outputting the first stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer. The first stagnation start command includes a special first stagnation start command and a non-special first stagnation start command. After the end of the first bonus effect state, when the control is performed to the normal effect state on the condition that the remaining upper limit value of the advantage is "0", that is, the first bonus game state is generated, resulting in an advantageous period. is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202. On the other hand, after the first bonus effect state ends, if the control to the normal effect state is not performed on the condition that the remaining advantageous upper limit value is "0", that is, when the first bonus game state is generated, the advantageous period ends. If the end condition is not satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs ending time measurement processing (step S203). In step S203, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined ending time and waits until the ending time elapses. Then, when the ending time has passed and the ending time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the first stagnation end command (step S204), and ends the special stagnation process. In the process of outputting the first stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation end command in the output buffer.

When the first bonus effect state has not ended (step S201: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the second bonus effect state has ended (step S205). In step S205, the main control CPU 40a determines in the end processing (step S122) whether the condition for ending the second bonus game state is satisfied and the effect state flag is set to a value that can specify the effect state other than the bonus effect state. judge. Determining that the second bonus effect state has ended in step S205 corresponds to determining that the final variation game in the second bonus game state has ended.

When the second bonus effect state ends (step S205: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of a second stagnation start command (step S206). In the process of outputting the second stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer. The second stagnation start command includes a special second stagnation start command and a non-special second stagnation start command. After the end of the second bonus effect state, when the control is performed to the normal effect state on condition that the remaining advantageous upper limit value is "0", that is, when the second bonus game state is generated, the advantageous period is reached. is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206. On the other hand, after the second bonus effect state ends, if the control to the normal effect state is not performed on the condition that the remaining advantageous upper limit value is "0", that is, if the second bonus game state is generated, the advantageous period ends. If the end condition is not satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs ending time measurement processing (step S207). In step S207, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined ending time and waits until the ending time elapses. Then, when the ending time has passed and the ending time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the second stagnation end command (step S208), and ends the special stagnation process. In the process of outputting the second stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation end command in the output buffer.

If the second bonus effect state has not ended (step S205: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the advantageous effect state has ended (step S209). In step S209, the main control CPU 40a sets a value that can specify the normal effect state to the effect state flag when the condition for ending the advantageous effect state (advantageous end condition) is satisfied in the end processing (step S122). determine whether Determining that the advantageous effect state has ended in step S209 corresponds to determining that the final variation game in the advantageous effect state has ended.

If the advantageous effect state has not ended (step S209: NO), the main control CPU 40a ends the special stagnation process. On the other hand, when the advantageous effect state ends (step S209: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the third stagnation start command (step S210). In the process of outputting the third stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation start command in the output buffer. The third stagnation start command includes a special third stagnation start command and a non-special third stagnation start command. Then, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state and the control is performed to the normal effect state (when the second end condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 40a outputs a special third stagnation start command in step S210. Store in buffer. On the other hand, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state (or the second advantageous effect state) and the control is performed to the normal effect state (when the first end condition is satisfied), in step S210, the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stall start command in the output buffer.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs ending time measurement processing (step S211). In step S211, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined ending time and waits until the ending time elapses. Then, when the ending time has passed and the ending time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the third stagnation end command (step S212), and ends the special stagnation process. In the process of outputting the third stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation end command in the output buffer.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S202 to S204, the processing of steps S206 to S208, and the processing of steps S210 to S212 correspond to stagnation control. In the following description, the processing of steps S202 to S204 is performed, the processing of steps S206 to S208 is performed, and the processing of steps S210 to S212 is performed. There is a case that it will be done. In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a executes the stagnation control by performing any one of the processes of steps S202 to S204, the processes of steps S206 to S208, and the processes of steps S210 to S212. A function as a control means is realized. Further, in the present embodiment, among the processes of steps S202 to S204, the processes of steps S206 to S208, and the processes of steps S210 to S212, in the processes of steps S203, S207, and S211, a predetermined ending time Measurement control, that is, measurement control of a predetermined ending time is performed. Stagnation control corresponds to freeze control, and execution of stagnation control is also referred to as "freezing".

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of steps S202 to S204 and the processing of steps S206 to S208 are performed after the final variation game in the bonus game state corresponding to the special state is completed. It can be seen that the stagnation control is executed after the game of . Similarly, in the present embodiment, since the processing of steps S210 to S212 is performed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state corresponding to the specific state is completed, the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state. It can be seen that

In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed, the effect display device 14 executes the ending effect. In the slot machine 10, an appearance effect in which a character appears may be executed in the effect display device 14 during execution of the ending effect. The effect contents of the appearance effect include the effect contents in which the first character appears, the effect contents in which the second character appears, and the effect contents in which the third character appears.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the effect content of the appearance effect is determined according to the set value. Specifically, when the setting value is "1", the effect content in which the first character appears with a probability of 90% and the effect content in which the second character appears with a probability of 10% are determined as the effect contents of the appearance effect. be. Further, when the set value is "2", the effect contents in which the first character appears with a probability of 50% and the effect contents in which the second character appears with a probability of 50% are determined as the effect contents of the appearance effect. If the set value is "3", there is a 30% chance that the first character will appear, a 60% chance that the second character will appear, and a 10% chance that the third character will appear. The effect content to be performed is determined as the effect content of the appearance effect.

In this embodiment, only when the set value is "3", the effect content in which the third character appears is determined as the effect content of the appearance effect. Therefore, when the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the third character appears, it can be specified that "3" is set as the set value. That is, the effect content in which the third character appears corresponds to the effect content informing that the set value is "3". In addition, in the present embodiment, the higher the advantage of the set value is, the easier it is to determine the effect content in which the second character appears compared to the effect content in which the first character appears. Therefore, when the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the second character appears, it is suggested that the set value is highly advantageous. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the set value, the higher the probability of winning the bonus combination and the higher the probability of establishing the bonus game state. That is, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the set value, the higher the advantage with respect to occurrence of the advantageous state (particularly, the bonus game state). Therefore, the appearance effect can be said to be a specific effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of an advantageous state. Also, the appearance effect can be said to be a effect of suggesting or notifying the degree of advantage in an advantageous state by suggesting or notifying a set value.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, during execution of the ending effect, the effect display device 14 may execute a starry sky effect in which stars, moons, and planets are displayed. The effect contents of the starry sky effect include the effect contents in which three stars are displayed, the effect contents in which the moon and stars are displayed, and the effect contents in which planets and stars are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the contents of the starry sky effect are determined according to the set internal mode. Specifically, in the case of the first internal mode, the effects of displaying three stars with a probability of 70% and the effects of displaying the moon and stars with a probability of 30% are determined as the effects of the starry sky effect. be. In addition, in the case of the second internal mode, the effect contents in which three stars are displayed with a probability of 40% and the effect contents in which the moon and stars are displayed with a probability of 60% are determined as the effect contents of the starry sky effect. In the third internal mode, there is a 5% chance that 3 stars will be displayed, an 80% chance that the moon and stars will be displayed, and a 15% chance that planets and stars will be displayed. The effect content to be displayed is determined as the effect content of the starry sky effect.

In the present embodiment, only when the third internal mode is set, the effect content in which planets and stars are displayed is determined as the effect content of the starry sky effect. Therefore, when the starry sky presentation is executed with the content of presentation in which planets and stars are displayed, the third internal mode can be identified. In other words, the presentation of the planets and stars corresponds to the presentation of the third internal mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, the higher the advantage of the internal mode, the easier it is to determine the effect content in which the moon and stars are displayed compared to the effect content in which three stars are displayed. Therefore, it is suggested that the internal mode is highly advantageous when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect content in which the moon and the stars are displayed. Therefore, the starry sky effect can be said to be a effect of suggesting or notifying the degree of advantage regarding occurrence of the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying the internal mode as the internal control state. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the internal mode is, the lower the ceiling number (that is, the upper limit number of games required until the next advantageous effect state is generated) tends to decrease. In other words, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the internal mode, the higher the advantage regarding occurrence of an advantageous state (especially, an advantageous effect state). Therefore, the starry sky effect can be said to be a specific effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of an advantageous state. Further, the starry sky effect can be said to be a effect of suggesting or notifying the degree of advantage regarding the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying the upper limit number of games required until the next advantageous state occurs.

Next, various ending effects will be described.
After the processing of steps S202 to S204 of the special stagnation process is performed by the main control CPU 40a and the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the ending effect in the first bonus effect state. . Further, the main control CPU 40a performs the processing of steps S204 to S206 of the special stagnation process, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the ending effect of the second bonus effect state. . Further, the main control CPU 40a performs the processing of steps S210 to S212 of the special stagnation process, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes an advantageous effect ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state ends, the effect display device 14 , a warning image TGa is displayed, and a warning regarding immersion is executed. The alert image TGa is "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed moderately. ] characters (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). That is, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are not satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus game state, and after the final variation game in the first bonus game state ends, the call to attention regarding addiction is "pachinko/ Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation. ] is displayed. In addition, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are not satisfied due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state, a warning regarding addiction after the final variation game in the first bonus game state ends is Let's watch out. ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image TGa corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Further, the alert image TGa is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGa is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as the reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGa is displayed in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel viewing area, to alert the player to the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGa is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the display area where the alert image TGa is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGa in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding the immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area where the alert image TGa is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following explanation, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state, the ending effect executed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state ends is This is shown as the first ending effect. In the first ending effect, an image 60 is displayed on the effect display device 14 . The image 60 reads, "Congratulations! ] is an image containing characters (character information).

When the first ending effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the third character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 simulating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the rear side of the attention calling image TGa. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGa is displayed on the front side of the image CH3. Further, when the first ending effect is executed, if the starry sky effect is executed with the effect content of displaying three stars, the effect display device 14 displays a three-star image YG1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

Further, when the first ending effect is being executed, the first special winning number effect relating to the number of game media acquired after the start of the first bonus game state is executed. In the first ending effect, the first winning number image GBa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the first special winning number effect is executed. The first winning number image GBa is an image showing the number of medals increased from before the start of the first bonus game state to the end of the first bonus game state. Therefore, by displaying the first win number image GBa on the effect display device 14 and executing the first special win number effect, the number of game media increased from before the start of the first bonus game state is notified.

Note that the image 60 displayed when the first ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image 60) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image image motion is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image operation is stagnant.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state ends, the effect display device 14 , a warning image TGb is displayed, and a warning regarding immersion is executed. The alert image TGb is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play. ] characters (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). That is, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus game state, and after the final variation game ends in the first bonus game state, the call for attention regarding addiction is "pachinko/ Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation. ] is displayed. In addition, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus game state, a warning regarding addiction after the end of the final variation game in the first bonus game state is, Let's watch out. ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the caution image TGb corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image TGb is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGb is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as the reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGb is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGb is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the display area where the alert image TGb is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGb in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding the immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGb is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met by the occurrence of the first bonus game state, and the ending effect executed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state is completed, This is shown as a second ending effect. In the second ending effect, an image 60 is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, in the second ending effect, the effect display device 14 displays a special image SP. The special image SP is an image including characters (character information) of "complete domination".

When the second ending effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 simulating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the rear side of the attention calling image TGb. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGb is displayed on the front side of the image CH3. Further, when the second ending effect is executed, if the starry sky effect is executed with the effect content of displaying three stars, the effect display device 14 displays a three-star image YG1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when attention is being called for the immersion. Further, when the second ending effect is being executed, the first win number image GBa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the first special win number effect is executed.

Note that the image 60 displayed when the second ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. Also, the special image SP displayed when the second ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image 60) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image image motion is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image operation is stagnated.

As shown in FIG. 20(c), when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, after the final variation game in the second bonus game state ends, the effect display device 14 , a warning image TGc is displayed, and a warning regarding the immersion is executed. The warning image TGc is "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed moderately. ] characters (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). That is, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are not satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the call to attention regarding immersion after the final variation game in the second bonus game state ends is "pachinko/ Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation. ] is displayed. In addition, in the case where the conditions for ending the advantageous period are not satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the warning regarding addiction after the end of the final variation game in the second bonus game state is "to addiction. Let's watch out. ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the caution image TGc corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image TGc is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention calling image TGc is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGc is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGc is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the display area where the alert image TGc is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGc in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area where the attention-calling image TGc is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following explanation, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the ending effect executed after the final variation game in the second bonus game state is finished is This is shown as the third ending effect. An image 61 is displayed on the effect display device 14 in the third ending effect. The image 61 is "Fight! ] is an image containing characters (character information).

When the third ending effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the first character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH1 simulating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed on the back side of the attention calling image TGc. That is, in the effect display device 14, the attention-calling image TGc is displayed on the front side of the image CH1. When the third ending effect is executed, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect content of displaying the moon and the stars, the effect display device 14 displays the image YG2 of the moon and the stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

Further, when the third ending effect is being executed, the second special winning number effect relating to the number of game media acquired after the start of the second bonus game state is executed. In the third ending effect, the second winning number image GBb is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the second special winning number effect is executed. The second winning number image GBb is an image showing the number of medals increased from before the start of the second bonus game state to the end of the second bonus game state. Therefore, by displaying the second win number image GBb on the effect display device 14 and executing the second special win number effect, the number of game media increased from before the start of the second bonus game state is notified.

Note that the image 61 displayed when the third ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image 61) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image image motion is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image operation is stagnant.

As shown in FIG. 20(d), when the condition for ending the advantageous period is established by the occurrence of the second bonus game state, after the final variation game in the second bonus game state ends, the effect display device 14 , a warning image TGd is displayed, and a warning regarding immersion is executed. The warning image TGd is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play. ] characters (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). That is, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are satisfied by the occurrence of the second bonus game state, and after the final variation game in the second bonus game state is finished, the call for attention regarding addiction is "pachinko/ Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation. ] is displayed. In addition, in the case where the conditions for ending the advantageous period are satisfied by the occurrence of the second bonus game state, and after the final variation game in the second bonus game state is completed, a warning regarding addiction is given as follows: Let's watch out. ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the caution image TGd corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel.

Also, the alert image TGd is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention calling image TGd is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGd is displayed in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGd is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the display area where the alert image TGd is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alert image TGd is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alert image TGd is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following explanation, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is met by the activation of the second bonus game state, the ending effect that is executed after the final variation game in the second bonus game state is completed is: Shown as the fourth ending effect. In the fourth ending effect, an image 61 is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, in the fourth ending effect, the effect display device 14 displays a special image SP.

When the fourth ending effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the first character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH1 simulating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed on the rear side of the attention calling image TGd. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGd is displayed on the front side of the image CH1. When the fourth ending effect is executed, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect content of displaying the moon and the stars, the effect display device 14 displays the image YG2 of the moon and the stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when attention is being called for the immersion. Also, when the fourth ending effect is being executed, the second winning number image GBb is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the second special winning number effect is executed.

Note that the image 61 displayed when the fourth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. Also, the special image SP displayed when the fourth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image 61) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image image motion is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image operation is stagnant.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), when an advantageous end condition is satisfied in a first advantageous effect state or a second advantageous effect state (when the first end condition is satisfied), the final variation game in the advantageous effect state After the end, the effect display device 14 displays a warning image TGe to call attention to the immersion. The warning image TGe is "Pachinko/Pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. ] characters (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). That is, in the case where the advantageous end condition is established in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, and after the end of the final variable game in the advantageous effect state, the call for attention regarding the immersion is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderate." It's fun to play. ] is displayed. In addition, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the warning regarding addiction after the final variable game in the advantageous effect state is completed is "Beware of addiction." . ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image TGe corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Also, the alert image TGe is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention calling image TGe is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. display area. In this way, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGe is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGe is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGe in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGe is displayed is a display area different from the transmission area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, when the advantageous end condition is established in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the ending effect executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is completed is the fifth ending effect. Shown as ending production.

When the fifth ending effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the second character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH2 simulating the second character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH2 is displayed on the back side of the attention calling image TGe. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGe is displayed on the front side of the image CH2. Further, when the fifth ending effect is executed, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect content of displaying three stars, an image YG1 of three stars is displayed on the effect display device 14.例文帳に追加As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

Further, when the fifth ending effect is being executed, a specific acquisition number effect regarding the number of game media acquired after the start of the advantageous period is executed. In the fifth ending effect, the specific win number image GBc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the specific win number effect is executed. The specific winning number image GBc is an image showing the number of medals increased from before the start of the advantageous period until the end of the advantageous period. Therefore, by displaying the specific winning number image GBc on the effect display device 14 and executing the specific winning number effect, the number of game media increased from before the start of the advantageous period is notified. In this embodiment, the number of game media acquired after the start of the advantageous period is not limited to the number of game media acquired in the advantageous effect state. The number of acquired game media is also included.

Note that the specific acquisition number image GBc displayed when the fifth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, the specific image (for example, the specific acquisition number image GBc) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without moving. , the motion of that particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the specific state continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image operation is stagnant.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state (when the second end condition is satisfied), the effect display device 14 , a warning image TGf is displayed, and a warning regarding immersion is executed. The warning image TGf is "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed moderately. ] characters (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). In other words, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in a special advantageous effect state, the warning regarding addiction after the end of the final variable game in the advantageous effect state is "Pachinko/Pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game." ] is displayed. In addition, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in a special advantageous effect state, the warning regarding addiction after the end of the final variable game in the advantageous effect state is "Beware of addiction." ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image TGf corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Also, the attention calling image TGf is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention calling image TGf is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmission type display. This is the display area. In this manner, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGf is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGf is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alert image TGf is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area where the attention-calling image TGf is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, the sixth ending effect is the ending effect executed after the final variable game in the advantageous effect state when the advantageous end condition is established in the special advantageous effect state. In the sixth ending effect, the heart movable body 25 operates. Since the attention-calling image TGf is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25, even if the heart-shaped movable body 25 moves in a front view, the heart-shaped movable body 25 is displayed as the attention-calling image TGf. does not cover Also, in the sixth ending effect, the effect display device 14 displays a special image SP.

When the sixth ending effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 simulating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the attention calling image TGf. That is, in the effect display device 14, the attention calling image TGf is displayed on the front side of the image CH3. Further, when the sixth ending effect is executed, if the starry sky effect is executed with the effect content of displaying the planets and the stars, the effect display device 14 displays an image YG3 of the planets and the stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when attention is being called for the immersion. Further, when the sixth ending effect is being executed, the specific winning number image GBc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the specific winning number effect is executed.

Note that the specific acquisition number image GBc displayed when the sixth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without being operated. Also, the special image SP displayed when the sixth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, the specific image (for example, the specific acquisition number image GBc) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without moving. , the motion of that particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the specific state continues to be displayed without moving, and the specific image operation is stagnated.

Controls related to various ending effects will be described below.
First, control related to the first ending effect will be described.
When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGa is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202 of the special stagnation process, the non-special first stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. Further, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 60 is displayed.

Further, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first win number image GBa is displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to display the first win number image GBa having the content of notifying a value that can be specified from the first bonus win information. For example, as shown in FIG. 20(a), when the value that can be specified from the information obtained during the first bonus is "216", the sub-control CPU 41a includes characters (character information) of "acquire 216 cards". The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the first winning number image GBa is displayed.

Further, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. do. The sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect according to the set value. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect in accordance with the set value that can be specified from the set value information stored in the sub-control RAM 41c. In this embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. It should be noted that the secondary control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect when the second ending effect to the sixth ending effect described below are executed in the same manner as when the first ending effect is executed. do.

Also, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect content is executed. do. The sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect according to the set internal mode. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect according to the internal mode that can be specified from the internal mode information stored in the sub-control RAM 41c. In this embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the details of the starry sky effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19(b) according to the internal mode that can be specified from the internal mode information. Note that the secondary control CPU 41a determines the details of the starry sky effect when the second ending effect to the sixth ending effect described below are executed in the same manner as when the first ending effect is executed. do.

Further, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. As described above, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed at least in the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14. FIG.

Also, when executing the first ending effect, that is, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGa and then starts measuring the specific time. If the command for setting the number of bets is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGa at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. In this embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the ending time measured in step S203 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first ending effect ends. to control. As a result, the effect display device 14 finishes displaying the image 60, the image related to the appearance effect (eg, image CH3), the image related to the starry sky effect (eg, image YG1), and the first acquired number image GBa. The awakening image TGa continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set during a specific period of time (within a specific period of time) from the start of execution of the call for attention regarding immersion after the final game in the special state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the bet amount setting command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the caution image TGa ends when the bet amount setting command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set after a specific period from the start of calling attention to addiction after the final game in the special state, the execution of calling attention to addiction ends.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the first ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first ending effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGa as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a will generate an alert image when ending the first ending effect. The display of TGa is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed.

Next, control related to the second ending effect will be described.
When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGb is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202 of the special stagnation process, the special first stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. , after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. Further, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 60 is displayed. Also, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the special image SP is displayed.

Further, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first win number image GBa is displayed. Further, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . Further, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect content is executed. . Further, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

Also, when executing the second ending effect, that is, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGb and then starts measuring the specific time. If the command for setting the number of bets is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGb at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows.

Further, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second ending effect ends. to control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image 60, the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starry sky effect, the special image SP, and the first acquisition number image GBa ends, the alert image TGb continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set during a specific period of time (within a specific period of time) from the start of execution of the call for attention regarding immersion after the final game in the special state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. On the other hand, when the number-of-bets setting command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the caution image TGb ends when the number-of-bets setting command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set after a specific period from the start of calling attention to addiction after the final game in the special state, the execution of calling attention to addiction ends.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the second ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second ending effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGb. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a will generate an alert image when ending the second ending effect. The display of TGb is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention for immersion and executes the attention for returning the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for addiction, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed.

Next, control related to the third ending effect will be described.
When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGc is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206 of the special stagnation process, the non-special second stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. Further, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 61 is displayed.

Further, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second win number image GBb is displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to display the second winning number image GBb having the content of notifying a value that can be specified from the second bonus winning information. For example, as shown in FIG. 20(c), when the value that can be specified from the obtained information during the second bonus is "81", the sub-control CPU 41a includes characters (character information) of "acquired 81 cards". The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the second winning number image GBb is displayed.

Further, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. do. Also, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect content is executed. do. Further, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

Also, when executing the third ending effect, that is, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGc and then starts measuring the specific time. If the command for setting the number of bets is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGc at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the ending time measured in step S207 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third ending effect ends. to control. As a result, the effect display device 14 ends the display of the image 61, the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starry sky effect, and the second acquisition number image GBb, but continues to display the alert image TGc. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set during a specific period of time (within a specific period of time) from the start of execution of the call for attention regarding immersion after the final game in the special state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the caution image TGc ends when the bet number setting command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set after a specific period from the start of calling attention to addiction after the final game in the special state, the execution of calling attention to addiction ends.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the third ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third ending effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGc as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a will generate an alert image when ending the third ending effect. The display of TGc is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed.

Next, control related to the fourth ending effect will be described.
When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGd is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206 of the special stagnation process, the special second stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. , after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. Further, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 61 is displayed. Also, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the special image SP is displayed.

Further, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second acquisition number image GBb is displayed. Further, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . Further, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect content is executed. . Further, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

Also, when executing the fourth ending effect, that is, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGd and then starts measuring the specific time. If the command for setting the number of bets is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGd at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows.

Further, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth ending effect ends. to control. As a result, the effect display device 14 stops displaying the image 61, the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starry sky effect, the special image SP, and the second acquired number image GBb, but continues to display the alert image TGd. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set during a specific period of time (within a specific period of time) from the start of execution of the call for attention regarding immersion after the final game in the special state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the bet amount setting command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the caution image TGd ends when the bet amount setting command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set after a specific period from the start of calling attention to addiction after the final game in the special state, the execution of calling attention to addiction ends.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the fourth ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth ending effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGd as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a will generate an alert image when ending the fourth ending effect. The display of TGd is also terminated. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention for immersion and executes the attention for returning the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for addiction, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed.

Next, control related to the fifth ending effect will be described.
When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fifth ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGe is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S210 of the special stagnation process, the non-special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed.

Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to display the specific acquisition number image GBc that notifies a value that can be specified from the advantageous period acquisition information. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(a), when the identifiable value from the advantageous period acquisition information is "1012", the sub-control CPU 41a generates a specific acquisition number including characters (character information) of "Total 1012 sheets". The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the image GBc is displayed.

Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. do. Also, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect content is executed. do. Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

Also, when executing the fifth ending effect, that is, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGe and then starts measuring the specific time. When the bet number setting command is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGe at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the ending time measured in step S211 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fifth ending effect ends. to control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starry sky effect, and the specific acquisition number image GBc is ended, the alert image TGe continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set within a specific period of time (within a specific period of time) from the start of execution of a call for attention regarding immersion after the final game in a specific state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the bet amount setting command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the caution image TGe ends when the bet amount setting command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set after a specific period from the start of calling attention to addiction after the final game in a specific state, the execution of calling attention to addiction ends.

Further, when a settlement command is input during execution of the fifth ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fifth ending effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGe as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a will generate an alert image when ending the fifth ending effect. The display of TGe is also terminated. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed.

Next, control related to the sixth ending effect will be described.
When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the sixth ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGf is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S210 of the special stagnation process, the special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. , after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. Further, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the special image SP is displayed.

Further, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed. In addition, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . Further, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect content is executed. . Further, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. In addition, when a special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 and causes the heart movable body 25 to operate.

Also, when executing the sixth ending effect, that is, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGf and then starts measuring the specific time. If the command for setting the number of bets is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGf at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows.

Further, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the sixth ending effect ends. to control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, the display of the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starry sky effect, the special image SP, and the specific acquisition number image GBc is terminated, but the alert image TGf continues to be displayed. At this time, the heart movable body 25 moves to the origin 25a and returns to the origin 25a. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set within a specific period of time (within a specific period of time) from the start of execution of a call for attention regarding immersion after the final game in a specific state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the number-of-bets setting command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the caution image TGf ends when the number-of-bets setting command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bets is set after a specific period from the start of calling attention to addiction after the final game in a specific state, the execution of calling attention to addiction ends.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the sixth ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the sixth ending effect. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGf as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a will generate an alert image when ending the sixth ending effect. The display of TGf is also terminated. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention for immersion and executes the attention for returning the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for addiction, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed.

Here, a description will be given of calling attention to the immersion executed in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to call attention (shown in FIG. 15(d)) regarding immersion by displaying the attention image GT3. In addition, the slot machine 10 provides an alert (shown in FIG. 20A) relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGa, and an alert image TGb relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGb. Alert (shown in FIG. 20(b)) and the like can be executed. In addition, the slot machine 10 provides an alert (shown in FIG. 20(c)) relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGc, and an alert image TGd relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGd. Attention alert (shown in FIG. 20(d)) is configured to be executable. In addition, the slot machine 10 provides an alert (shown in FIG. 21A) relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGe, and an alert image TGf relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGf. Attention alert (shown in FIG. 21(b)) is configured to be executable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the call for attention regarding immersion executed by displaying the attention call image GT3 corresponds to the call for attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGa and the attention regarding immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGb are the first bonus games. This corresponds to calling attention to addiction executed after the final game in which the state changes. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGc and the attention regarding immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGd are performed in the second bonus game. This corresponds to calling attention to addiction executed after the final game in which the state changes. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding the immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGe and the attention regarding the immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGf are performed in the advantageous effect state. This corresponds to a call for attention regarding addiction executed after the final variable game.

All of the alert images GT3, TGa to TGf are "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play. ] (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). That is, during execution of the standby effect, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the second bonus game state, and after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. The content of the warning regarding addiction to runo is, “Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] is displayed. Also, during execution of the standby effect, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the second bonus game state, and after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. The content of the warning about addiction is "Be careful of addiction. ] is displayed.

In this way, the content of the attention regarding addiction executed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the attention regarding immersion executed after the final variation game in the bonus game. In other words, the content of the call for attention regarding addiction executed after the final variation game in the bonus game is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed after the final game in the special state.

Note that, in the present embodiment, when a single bonus game state is generated even in a bonus game, no alert regarding addiction is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the single bonus game state corresponding to the second special state is generated, the attention regarding immersion is not executed, and when the specific bonus game state corresponding to the first special state is generated. , a warning about immersion is executed. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed after the final variation game in the specific bonus game state.

In addition, the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed after the final game in the specific state.

Further, the content of the attention call regarding immersion executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state is the same as the content of the attention call regarding immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the content of the call for attention regarding addiction executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the attention to addiction executed after the final game in the special state is the same as the content of the attention to addiction executed after the final game in the specific state.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, during execution of the standby effect, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the second bonus game state, and in the advantageous effect state, the final After the change game, the content of the alert regarding the immersion executed in is common and the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed after the final game in the specific state are the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect and the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the final game in the special state. This is the same as the content of the alert regarding addiction executed after the game. In other words, the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed after the final game in the special state are the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect, and the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed after the final game in the specific state. It is the same as the content of the alert regarding immersion. In other words, the content of the attention regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect is the content of the attention regarding immersion executed after the final game in the special state, and the content of the attention regarding the immersion executed after the final game in the specific state. It is the same as the content of the alert regarding addiction.

In the slot machine 10, when a warning about addiction is executed, "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play. ] (character information) are displayed on the effect display device 14 . “Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] contains the characters (character information) "Pachinko" indicating a pachinko machine in which game balls are used as a game medium, and the characters (character information) "Pachislot" indicating a slot machine in which medals are used as a game medium. and are included. In other words, “Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] contains a warning about addiction to variable games (games) on pachinko machines and a warning about addiction to variable games (games) on slot machines. . That is, in the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding addiction includes, in addition to alerting regarding addiction to games in a slot machine (a gaming machine in which the first game medium is used as a game medium), a pachinko gaming machine (second game medium). (gaming machine that uses the game medium of 2) as a game medium). A call to attention regarding addiction to playing a slot machine (a gaming machine in which the first game medium is used as a game medium) corresponds to a call to attention regarding addiction to playing the slot machine. It corresponds to calling attention. Similarly, calling attention to addiction to playing a pachinko gaming machine (a gaming machine in which the second game medium is used as the game medium) corresponds to calling attention to addiction to playing the pachinko gaming machine. This corresponds to calling attention to the addiction to the game machine.

As shown in FIG. 22, among game halls, there are, for example, slot machines in which medals are used as game media, and pachinko machines in which game balls are used as game media. As described above, some game halls have gaming machines that use different game media. In such amusement arcades, one player may enjoy a variable game on a pachinko machine, and may enjoy a variable game on a slot machine before or after that. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, in addition to calling attention to addiction to the variable game in the slot machine, by executing attention to addiction with content including attention to addiction to the game in the pachinko game machine, the effect It is possible to execute alerting regarding target immersion.

In addition, “Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] can also be said to be characters (character information) that indicate gaming machines in general. “Pachinko and pachislot are games that are enjoyed in moderation. ] can be said to be characters (character information) indicating the slot machine 10 displaying the alert images GT3, TGa to TGf, that is, characters (character information) indicating the gaming machine. In this case, it can be said that the content of the alert regarding addiction includes the alert regarding addiction to the gaming machine in general, in addition to the alert regarding addiction to the variable game in this gaming machine.

Further, in the slot machine 10, even if any one of the attention-calling images GT3, TGa to TGf is displayed to call attention to the immersion, the content of the attention to the immersion is the same. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(d), FIGS. 20(a) to 20(d), FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the attention-calling image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14. The position where the attention-calling images TGa to TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14 is different. Also, the size of the attention calling image GT3 displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention calling images TGa to TGf displayed on the effect display device 14 . In other words, the display area where the attention calling image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention calling images TGa to TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters (character information) included in the caution image GT3 is different from the typeface of the characters (character information) included in the caution images TGa to TGf. Further, the color of the characters included in the caution image GT3 (so-called character color) is different from the color of the characters included in the caution images TGa to TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert image GT3 is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa to TGf. Here, regarding the image displayed when a warning about immersion is executed, the displayed position, size, displayed display area, typeface of characters included in the image, color of characters included in the image, image However, if at least one of them is different, it can be said that the mode of calling attention to immersion is different.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. In other words, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final game in the special state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final game in the specific state.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) to 20(d), 21(a) and 21(b), the positions where the attention-calling images TGa to TGd are displayed on the effect display device 14 , different from the positions where the alert images TGe and TGf are displayed. Also, the sizes of the attention calling images TGa to TGd displayed on the effect display device 14 are different from the sizes of the attention calling images TGe and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area in which the attention-calling images TGa to TGd are displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention-calling images TGe and TGf are displayed in the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution images TGa to TGd is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution images TGe and TGf. Further, the color of the characters included in the attention-calling images TGa to TGd is different from the color of the characters included in the attention-calling images TGe and TGf. In addition, the size of characters included in the attention-calling images TGa to TGd is different from the size of the characters included in the attention-calling images TGe and TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is the aspect of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. different from In other words, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed after the final game in the specific state is different from the mode of calling attention to addiction executed after the final game in the special state.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) to 20(d), the positions where the attention-calling images TGa and TGb are displayed on the effect display device 14 are the positions where the attention-calling images TGc and TGd are displayed on the effect display device 14. different from Also, the sizes of the attention-calling images TGa and TGb displayed on the effect display device 14 are different from the sizes of the attention-calling images TGc and TGd displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling images TGa and TGb are displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling images TGc and TGd are displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution images TGa and TGb is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution images TGc and TGd. In addition, the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGb is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGc and TGd. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGb is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGc and TGd.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state is related to addiction executed after the final variation game in the second bonus game state. It differs from the mode of alerting. In other words, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the second bonus gaming state is different from the mode of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the position where the attention calling image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the attention calling image TGb is displayed on the effect display device 14. . Also, the size of the attention calling image TGa displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention calling image TGb displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling image TGb is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGa is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGb. Also, the color of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the color of the characters included in the alert image TGb. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGb.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 20(c) and 20(d), the position where the attention-calling image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14 is the same as the position where the attention-calling image TGd is displayed on the effect display device 14. different. Further, the size of the attention calling image TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention calling image TGd displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling image TGd is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGc is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGd. Also, the color of the characters included in the attention-calling image TGc is different from the color of the characters included in the attention-calling image TGd. In addition, the size of characters included in the alert image TGc is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGd.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the bonus game state, the mode of calling attention to immersion is advantageous when the bonus game state occurs. This is different from the form of calling attention to addiction which is executed when the end condition of the period is not satisfied. As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to immersion that is executed when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are satisfied due to the occurrence of a special state is the termination of the advantageous period due to the occurrence of a special state. It is different from the mode of calling attention to addiction which is executed when the condition is not satisfied. That is, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion is when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are satisfied due to the occurrence of a special state, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are not satisfied due to the occurrence of a special state. It depends on the case.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the position where the attention calling image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the attention calling image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14. . Also, the size of the attention calling image TGe displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention calling image TGf displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGe is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGf. Also, the color of the characters included in the caution image TGe is different from the color of the characters included in the caution image TGf. In addition, the size of characters included in the alert image TGe is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for ending the advantageous rendering state are satisfied in the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state, the aspect of calling attention to the immersion is advantageous in the special advantageous rendering state. It is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion that is executed when the end condition of the effect state is satisfied. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first termination condition among the termination conditions of the specific state is satisfied and the particular state terminates, the mode of calling attention regarding immersion is the second termination condition of the specific state. 2. It is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion that is executed when the end condition is satisfied and the specific state ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion differs depending on whether the specific state ends when the first end condition is met or when the specific state ends when the second end condition is met.

Here, based on FIGS. 23(a) to 23(c), after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, during execution of the standby effect, The display contents of the effect display device 14 when attention is called for the immersion in are compared and explained. Note that FIG. 23(a) shows the display contents of the effect display device 14 when attention is called for immersion after the final variation game in the first bonus game state. It is assumed that the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence. Also, FIG. 23(b) shows the display contents of the effect display device 14 when attention is called for immersion after the last variable game in the advantageous effect state. It is assumed that the state is not the advantageous effect state (for example, the state is the first advantageous effect state).

As shown in FIG. 23(a), after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, a warning image TGa is displayed to call attention to immersion. Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, a warning image TGe is displayed, and a warning regarding immersion is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 23(c), during execution of the standby effect, a warning image GT3 is displayed, and a warning regarding immersion is executed. The alert images GT3, TGa, and TGe each include the same characters (character information). Therefore, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, and during the execution of the standby effect, the contents of the alert regarding the immersion to be executed are the same. Become.

On the other hand, as described above, the attention-calling images GT3, TGa, and TGe differ in the positions and display areas displayed on the effect display device 14. FIG. Also, the alert images GT3, TGa, and TGe are different in size. Characters included in the alert images GT3, TGa, and TGe are different in character style, color, and size. Therefore, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the advantageous performance state, and during execution of the standby performance, the mode of calling attention to the executed immersion is different.

However, when viewed from the front, the display area in which the attention-calling images GT3, TGa, and TGe are displayed on the effect display device 14 is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 . That is, the attention-calling images GT3, TGa, and TGe are common in that they are displayed in a region of the display region of the effect display device 14 that does not overlap the action region of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(a), when the attention calling image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state to call attention to immersion, the image CH2 is displayed. Appearance production is executed. In the appearance effect, set values are suggested or notified. Further, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, when the attention calling image TGa is displayed to call attention to the immersion, the planet and star image YG3 is displayed and the starry sky effect is performed. . In the starry sky presentation, the internal mode is suggested or notified. Further, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, the attention calling image TGa is displayed in a display area different from the transmissive area 14a to call attention to the immersion. In addition, when the caution image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state to draw attention to the immersion, the backlight BL is extinguished. This makes it difficult to visually recognize reels and symbols through the transmissive area 14a. Further, when the caution image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state to draw attention to the immersion, the transmissive area 14a of the effect display device 14, which is a transmissive display, is displayed in one color. image is displayed. This makes it difficult to visually recognize reels and symbols through the transmissive area 14a.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 23(b), after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, the attention calling image TGe is displayed to call attention to the immersion, and the image CH1 is displayed and appears. A performance is performed. In addition, when the attention calling image TGe is displayed after the final variation game in the advantageous performance state to call attention to the immersion, the image YG2 of the moon and the stars is displayed and the starry sky performance is executed. Further, after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, a warning image TGe is displayed in a display area different from the transmissive area 14a, and a warning regarding immersion is executed. Further, when the alert image TGe is displayed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state to alert the player to the immersion, the backlight BL is extinguished. Further, when the attention calling image TGe is displayed after the last variable game in the advantageous effect state to call attention to the immersion, a single-color image is displayed in the transmissive area 14a of the effect display device 14, which is a transmissive display. is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(c), when the alert image GT3 is displayed during execution of the standby effect to call attention to the immersion, the appearance effect is not executed. Further, when the alert image GT3 is displayed during execution of the standby effect to call attention to the immersion, the starry sky effect is not executed. The backlight BL is extinguished when the attention calling image GT3 is displayed during execution of the standby performance to call attention to the immersion. Further, when the attention calling image GT3 is displayed during execution of the standby effect to call attention to the immersion, an image of one color is displayed in the transmissive area 14a of the effect display device 14 which is a transmissive display. .

Next, based on FIG. 24(a) to FIG. 24(c), after the end of the first bonus game state, after the end of the single bonus game state, and after the end of the first advantageous effect state will be described.
As shown in FIG. 24(a), execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t11 after the final variation game in the first bonus game state. It should be noted that the bell combination is assumed to have won in the final variation game in the first bonus game state. Also, the effect state controlled after the end of the first bonus game state, that is, after the end of the first bonus effect state is assumed to be the normal effect state.

In the stagnation control started at timing t11, a predetermined ending time measurement process is performed, and the stagnation control is continued at least for the ending time. Further, when execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t11, the first ending effect is executed. At this time, an alert image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and an alert regarding the immersion is executed. Also, assume that the bet button 18 is operated at timing t12 before the ending time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t12, since the stagnation control is being executed, even if the bet button 18 is operated, the number of bets is not set.

Further, when the bet number is set by operating the bet button 18 at timing t13 after the ending time has elapsed from timing t11 and before the specific time has elapsed from timing t11, the first The execution of the ending production of is completed. At this time, it is controlled to the normal effect state, and the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the normal effect state. However, from timing t11 to timing t14 when a specific period of time elapses, the effect display device 14 continues to display the caution image TGa, and the execution of the attention regarding the immersion continues.

On the other hand, when the bet number is set by operating the bet button 18 at timing t15 after the ending time has passed from timing t11 and after the specific time has passed since timing t11, the number of bets is set. Execution of the ending effect of 1 ends. At this time, it is controlled to the normal effect state, and the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the normal effect state. In addition, when the execution of the first ending effect ends, the display of the attention-calling image TGa also ends, and the attention-calling regarding the immersion ends.

Incidentally, when the waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t11, the execution of the waiting effect is started. Then, during execution of the standby effect, the attention calling image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 to call attention to the immersion. In this case, until the standby time elapses, the first ending performance continues to be executed, so the attention calling image TGa continues to be displayed on the performance display device 14, and the attention to the immersion continues to be executed. As described above, after the payout combination wins in the final game in the special state, the attention regarding the immersion is executed, and the attention regarding the immersion is executed until at least the specified time elapses. Furthermore, when a predetermined waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets after that, the execution of the waiting performance is started, and a call to attention regarding the immersion is executed during the execution of the standby performance.

Also, even if the bet number is set by operating the bet button 18 at the timing t12 when the stagnation control is being executed, the bet number is not set, and the next production state is the normal production state. nor is it controlled by On the other hand, if the bet number is set by operating the bet button 18 at timing t13 or timing t15 after the end of the stagnation control, the bet number is set, and the next production state is the normal production state. The Rukoto. Therefore, by executing the stagnation control, the control to the effect state controlled after the end of the first bonus game state is stagnated. In this way, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, it can be controlled to the special production mode (the production state controlled after the end of the bonus game state) after the final game in the special state. be stagnated.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), when a single bonus combination is won in a variable game executed under control in the normal effect state, control is effected in the single bonus game state, but the effect state is the normal effect state. is continuously controlled. When one variation game is executed in the single-bonus game state and the single-bonus game state ends, the ending effect is not executed after the single-bonus game state ends. In addition, after the single bonus game state ends, the stagnation control is not executed. Further, after the single bonus game state is ended, no attention is given to the immersion.

As shown in FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b), in the slot machine 10, stagnation control is executed after the first bonus game state is ended, while stagnation control is executed after the single bonus game state is ended. not. In addition, in the slot machine 10, after the first bonus game state is finished, the attention about the immersion is executed, but after the single bonus game state is finished, the attention about the immersion is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 24(c), execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t21 after the final variation game in the first advantageous effect state. In addition, it is assumed that the replay combination wins in the final variable game in the first advantageous effect state. Also, the effect state controlled after the end of the first advantageous effect state is assumed to be the normal effect state.

In the stagnation control started at timing t21, a predetermined ending time measurement process is performed, and the stagnation control is continued at least for the ending time. Further, when execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t21, the fifth ending effect is executed. At this time, an alert image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and an alert regarding the immersion is executed. Also, assume that the start lever 20 is operated at timing t22 before the ending time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t22, since the stagnation control is being executed, the variable game is not executed even if the start lever 20 is operated while the replay is granted.

Further, when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t23 after the ending time has passed from timing t21 and before the specific time has passed since timing t21, execution of the fifth ending effect is finished. At this time, it is controlled to the normal effect state, and the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the normal effect state. Further, the variable game is executed when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t23. Note that, from timing t21 to timing t24 when a specific time elapses, the effect display device 14 continues to display the attention-calling image TGe, and continues to execute attention-calling regarding immersion.

On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t25 after the ending time has passed since timing t21 and after the specific time has passed since timing t21, the execution of the fifth ending effect ends. . At this time, it is controlled to the normal effect state, and the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the normal effect state. In addition, when the execution of the fifth ending effect is completed, the display of the alert image TGe is also terminated, and the attention regarding the immersion is terminated. Further, the variable game is executed when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t25.

Incidentally, if the start lever 20 is not operated even after a specific time has passed from the timing t21, the fifth ending effect continues to be executed, and the effect display device 14 continues to display the attention-calling image TGe, so that a warning about immersion can be made. Awakening continues. However, even if the standby time elapses without the start lever 20 being operated even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t21, the standby effect is not executed. As described above, after a re-playing role wins a prize in the final game in a specific state, the attention regarding the immersion is executed, and the attention regarding the immersion is executed until at least a specific time elapses, After that, even if the predetermined waiting time elapses, the waiting performance is not executed.

Even if the start lever 20 is operated at the timing t22 when the stagnation control is executed and the replay is given, the next variation game is not executed, and the control is made to the normal effect state which is the next effect state. not even On the other hand, if the start lever 20 is operated when the replay is given at timing t23 or timing t25 after the stagnation control is finished, the next variable game is executed, and control is made to the normal effect state which is the next effect state. It will be done. Therefore, by executing the stagnation control, the control to the effect state controlled after the end of the first advantageous effect state is stagnated. In this way, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, the specific effect mode (the effect state controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state (normal effect state)) after the final game in the specific state. Being controlled stagnates. In addition, execution of the next variation game is delayed by execution of the stagnation control.

Further, when shifting from the first advantageous performance state to the normal performance state, a warning image TGe is displayed to call attention to the immersion before the first variation game in the normal performance state to be shifted. That is, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the first specific state to the normal state, a warning regarding immersion is executed before the first game in the normal state to which the transition is made. In this way, when the first advantageous effect state is shifted to the normal effect state, after the execution of the stagnation control is started after the final variation game in the first advantageous effect state, attention to the immersion is executed. ing. Furthermore, after the execution of the call for attention regarding the immersion is started, the state shifts to the normal rendering state. That is, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the first specific state to the normal state, after the execution of the stagnation control is started after the final game in the first specific state, attention to the immersion is executed. , and after the start of execution of calling attention to the immersion, the state shifts to the normal state.

Although not shown, when the first advantageous performance state is shifted to the second advantageous performance state, it is not the case where the advantageous performance state is terminated and the state is shifted to the normal performance state, so that attention to the immersion is not executed. That is, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the second advantageous effect state, attention regarding immersion is not executed before the first variable game in the second advantageous effect state to which the state is shifted. That is, in this embodiment, when shifting from the first specific state to the second specific state, the attention regarding immersion is not executed prior to the first game in the transition to the second specific state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the first specific state to the second specific state, the first specific state is not executed before the game is played for the first time in the second specific state. When transitioning from a state to a normal state, a warning regarding immersion is executed before the first game in the transitioning normal state.

Further, even when the second advantageous performance state is shifted to the first advantageous performance state, since the advantageous performance state is not terminated and the state is shifted to the normal performance state, the attention regarding the immersion is not executed. In other words, when shifting from the second advantageous effect state to the first advantageous effect state, attention regarding immersion is not executed before the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state to which the state is shifted. That is, in this embodiment, when shifting from the second specific state to the first specific state, the attention regarding immersion is not executed prior to the first game in the transition to the first specific state.

Similarly, in the case of shifting from the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state to the special advantageous rendering state, it is not the case that the advantageous rendering state ends and the transition to the normal rendering state occurs. not. That is, when shifting from the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state to the special advantageous rendering state, the attention regarding the immersion is not executed before the first variation game in the transitioning special advantageous rendering state.

Next, based on FIG.25(a) and FIG.25(b), the flow of an effect|presentation when a settlement button is operated and settlement processing is performed is demonstrated.
As shown in FIG. 25A, when the credit is 30 and the number of bets is 3, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated. At this time, if replay is not granted, "30" medals stored as credits and "3" medals set as the number of bets are paid out, and settlement is made. be done. Along with this, the effect display device 14 displays the settlement effect image SG, and the execution of the settlement effect is started. Further, after the execution of the settlement effect, the effect display device 14 displays the attention calling image GTx, and the execution of the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is started. Furthermore, after the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium, the effect display device 14 starts executing the standby effect.

During the execution of the waiting effect, the effect display device 14 displays the attention calling image GT3 to call attention to the immersion. The slot machine 10 is configured such that the sound volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB during execution of the standby effect. During execution of the standby effect, an effect executed by displaying an image GMx including characters (character information) of "You can adjust the volume by pressing the menu button" on the effect display device 14, that is, the menu button MB. The effect related to the operation of is executed after the attention related to the immersion is called by displaying the attention calling image GT3. That is, during the execution of the standby effect, the effect display device 14 executes an effect related to the operation of the menu button MB after executing a call for attention regarding the immersion. As described above, in the present embodiment, during execution of the standby effect, the effect execution means executes the effect related to the operation of the predetermined operation means after executing the attention calling regarding the immersion.

FIG. 25(b) shows that the settlement button 19 is operated and the settlement process is executed while the attention regarding the immersion is being called by displaying the attention calling image GT3 during execution of the standby effect. It shows the flow of the production at that time. When the attention calling image GT3 is displayed to call attention to the immersion, and the credit is 12 and the number of bets is 0, settlement processing is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated. . At this time, "12" medals stored as credits are paid out and settled.

Further, when the settlement button 19 is operated and settlement processing is performed, the display of the attention calling image GT3 on the effect display device 14 ends, and the execution of the attention calling regarding immersion ends. That is, when the payout button 19 is operated while the attention is being called for the addiction, the execution of the attention for the addiction is terminated. Further, as the settlement processing is performed, the effect display device 14 displays the settlement effect image SG, and the execution of the settlement effect is started. Further, after the execution of the settlement effect, the effect display device 14 displays the attention calling image GTx, and the execution of the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is started. That is, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being called for the immersion, the effect display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention for the immersion and executes the attention for the return of the storage medium. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the payout operation means is operated while the attention regarding immersion is being executed, the performance execution means ends the execution of the attention regarding immersion, and the attention regarding return of the storage medium is terminated. Awakening is executed. By the way, after execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium, the effect display device 14 starts executing the standby effect. During the execution of the standby effect, the attention calling image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the immersion is executed.

Note that FIG. 25B illustrates the case where the checkout button 19 is operated during the execution of the attention regarding the immersion that is executed by displaying the attention image GT3. It is not limited to the execution of the alert regarding. For example, even when attention is being called for immersion by displaying any one of the attention-calling images TGa to TGf, execution of the attention for immersion ends when the payment button 19 is operated. . After the execution of the attention regarding the immersion ends, the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is executed.

Next, based on FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), the flow of effects when the settlement button is operated after winning a bell combination as a payout combination, and the case where the settlement button is operated after winning a replay combination I will explain the flow of the production.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), when the bell combination wins, 10 medals are given as a prize and credits are increased. At this time, it is assumed that the credit after the increase is "26". After that, when the settlement button 19 is operated before the bet number is set, that is, when the bet number is "0", the settlement process is executed. At this time, "26" medals stored as credits are paid out and settled. Along with this, the effect display device 14 displays the settlement effect image SG, and the execution of the settlement effect is started. Further, after the execution of the settlement effect, the effect display device 14 displays the attention calling image GTx, and the execution of the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is started. Furthermore, after the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium, the effect display device 14 starts executing the standby effect. Further, during the standby effect, a caution image GT3 is displayed to draw attention to the immersion. In this way, when the settlement button 19 is operated after winning the bell role in the variable game, the settlement process is performed, the execution of the standby effect is started, and a warning regarding immersion is issued during the execution of the standby effect. executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated after the payout combination is won in the game, the settlement control is performed, the execution of the standby effect is started, and attention is paid to immersion during the execution of the standby effect. Awakening is executed.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), when the replay combination wins, medals are not awarded, but the number of bets is set by awarding the replay. At this time, it is assumed that "3" is set as the number of bets. After that, if the settlement button 19 is operated before the start lever 20 is operated, the settlement process is executed. At this time, when the credit is "16", the "16" medals stored as the credit are paid out and settled, while the bet number continues to be set to "3". Along with this, the effect display device 14 displays the settlement effect image SG, and the execution of the settlement effect is started. Further, after the execution of the settlement effect, the effect display device 14 displays the attention calling image GTx, and the execution of the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is started. However, execution of the standby effect is not started after the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. At this time, the background image in the normal effect state is displayed on the effect display device 14 if, for example, the normal effect state is controlled. In this way, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the winning of the replay combination in the variable game, the execution of the standby effect is not started while the settlement processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated after the replay combination is won in the game, the execution of the standby effect is not started while the settlement control is performed.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the winning of the replay combination, the settlement process is performed, but the execution of the standby effect is not started, and the settlement button is pressed after the winning of the bell combination. When 19 is operated, the settlement process is performed, the execution of the standby performance is started, and the attention regarding the immersion is executed during the execution of the standby performance. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated after the replay combination is won, the settlement operation means is operated after the payout combination is won, while the settlement control is performed, the execution of the standby effect is not started. When it is operated, adjustment control is performed, the execution of the standby performance is started, and attention is drawn to the immersion during the execution of the standby performance.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, the settlement button 19 is operated after winning the replay combination in the variable game, and the settlement button 19 is operated after winning the payout combination in the variable game. , the effect display device 14 executes a settlement effect. That is, in the present embodiment, in both the case where the settlement operation means is operated after the winning of the replay combination in the game and the case where the settlement operation means is operated after the winning of the payout combination in the game, the production is performed. The executing means executes a settlement effect relating to the settlement of the game media.

The slot machine 10 of this embodiment has the following effects.
(1) Stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) generated after the bonus stop (special display result) is derived, and the execution of the stagnation control is started. After that, an alert regarding the immersion is executed. In this way, after the last variable game in the bonus game state, the stagnation control is executed to temporarily suspend the play, and then the attention to the addiction is executed, thereby effectively executing the attention to the addiction. be able to. In addition, after the final game in the bonus game state, a warning regarding addiction is executed, so it is possible to suppress addiction after the bonus game state ends.

In particular, in slot machines, even during the performance of the performance, the performance in progress is often interrupted by, for example, inserting medals or operating the start lever. In such a slot machine, it is possible to effectively draw attention to immersion even in a slot machine by suspending play by performing a unique control called stagnation control.

(2) A bonus game is played when a bonus game state (special state) is generated and the conditions for ending the advantageous period are satisfied, and when the bonus game state is generated and the conditions for the end of the advantageous period are not satisfied. After the execution of the stagnation control is started after the final variation game (game) in the state, the mode of calling attention to the immersion is made different. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the termination condition of the advantageous period has been satisfied by the activation of the bonus game state, from the mode of calling attention to the addiction. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in calling attention to immersion, and to effectively call attention to immersion.

(3) Execution of the stagnation control after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) causes the effect state (special effect mode) to be controlled after the final variation game in the bonus game state (special effect mode). control is stagnant. As a result, during execution of the stagnation control, the player's interest shifts to the next effect state by being controlled to the effect state controlled after the bonus game state ends, and the player's interest in calling attention to immersion decreases. You can prevent things from happening.

(4) When the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state), a specific image (for example, image 60 or image 61) displayed after the final variation game. continues to be displayed without operation, and the operation of the particular image is stalled. For example, if a specific image moves while a warning about immersion is being executed, there is a risk that the player's interest will shift to the specific image. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in calling attention to immersion.

(5) In game halls, for example, slot machines using medals as game media (gaming machines using first game media as game media) and pachinko machines using game balls as game media ( There is a gaming machine that uses a second game medium as a game medium). In such amusement arcades, one player may enjoy (play) a variable game on a slot machine or may enjoy a variable game on a pachinko machine. Therefore, the content of the attention to the addiction includes attention to the addiction to the variable game (game) on the pachinko machine in addition to the attention to the addiction to the variable game (game) on the slot machine. As a result, in addition to alerting players who play slot machines about their addiction to variable games on slot machines, it is also possible to warn them about their addiction to variable games on pachinko machines. A warning about immersion can be executed.

(6) Stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in an advantageous effect state (specific state) in which a bell navi effect is executed as a guidance effect to guide operations that can acquire profits, and the stagnation control is executed. is started, a warning about immersion is executed. In this way, after the last game in the advantageous effect state, the stagnation control is executed to temporarily suspend the play, and then the attention regarding the addiction is executed, thereby effectively executing the attention regarding the addiction. can be done. In addition, after the final game in the advantageous effect state, attention to addiction is called, so it is possible to suppress addiction after the advantageous effect state ends.

(7) The case where the number of advantageous stays becomes "0" without the advantageous upper limit value becoming less than "100" corresponds to the case where the first end condition among the conditions for ending the advantageous effect state (specific state) is met. do. In addition, when the advantageous upper limit is less than "100" and the advantageous upper limit is "0", or when the number of advantageous stays is "0", the second end condition among the conditions for ending the advantageous effect state is corresponds to the case where Then, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous effect state is ended, and when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous effect state is ended, the final variation game in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is performed. (Game) After the execution of the stagnation control is started, the mode of calling attention to the immersion is made different. As a result, it is possible to grasp which of the first end condition and the second end condition is met to end the advantageous effect state from the mode of calling attention to the immersion. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in calling attention to immersion, and to effectively call attention to immersion.

(8) Execution of stagnation control after the final variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) causes the effect state (specific effect mode) to be controlled after the final variable game in the advantageous effect state (specific state). control is stagnant. As a result, during the execution of the stagnation control, the interest of the player shifts to the next effect state by being controlled to the effect state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state, and the player's interest in calling attention to immersion is reduced. You can prevent things from happening.

(9) When the stagnation control is executed after the final variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state), a specific image (for example, specific acquisition number image GBc) displayed after the final variable game. continues to be displayed without operation, and the operation of the particular image is stalled. For example, if a specific image moves while a warning about immersion is being executed, there is a risk that the player's interest will shift to the specific image. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in calling attention to immersion.

(10) If the number of bets (number of bets) is set within a specific period of time, the warning regarding immersion will continue to be executed without ending, so the final variable game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) ) It is possible to issue a warning regarding addiction for at least a specific period after the execution of the attention regarding addiction is started later. For this reason, regardless of the period after the execution of the warning regarding immersion, the warning regarding immersion is effectively executed compared to the case where the warning regarding immersion ends when the number of bets is set as a trigger. be able to.

In addition, if the number of bets is set after a specific period of time after the execution of the attention call for addiction after the final variable game in the bonus game state, the attention about addiction will be issued until the number of bets is set after the specific period. is executed, and when the number of bets is set after a specific period of time, the alert regarding the immersion ends. Therefore, even if the number of bets is not set within a specific period after the final variable game in the bonus game state, it is possible to call attention to immersion until the number of bets is set after the specific period. It is possible to effectively call attention to immersion.

(11) By executing a call for attention regarding immersion after execution of stagnation control and temporary stagnation of play, it becomes easier to draw attention to the attention regarding immersion. Also, the specific period is set longer than the execution period during which the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state). As a result, for example, even if a player who has little interest in calling attention to addiction sets the number of bets (number of bets) immediately after the end of stagnation control, the attention to addiction will not end within a specific period. continue to run without For this reason, it is possible to make the user feel uncomfortable that the alert regarding the immersion does not end, and increase interest in the alert regarding the immersion. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to addiction to a player who is not interested in the attention to addiction.

(12) If the number of bets (number of bets) is set within a specific period, the attention regarding immersion will continue to be executed without ending, so the final variable game (game ) It is possible to issue a warning regarding addiction for at least a specific period after the execution of the attention regarding addiction is started later. For this reason, regardless of the period after the execution of the warning regarding immersion, the warning regarding immersion is effectively executed compared to the case where the warning regarding immersion ends when the number of bets is set as a trigger. be able to.

In addition, if the number of bets is set after a specific period of time after the execution of the attention call regarding immersion after the final variable game in the advantageous effect state, the attention regarding immersion will be issued until the number of bets is set after the specific period. is executed, and when the number of bets is set after a specific period of time, the alert regarding the immersion ends. Therefore, even if the number of bets is not set within a specific period after the final variable game in the advantageous effect state, it is possible to call attention to immersion until the number of bets is set after the specific period. It is possible to effectively call attention to immersion.

(13) By executing a call for attention regarding immersion after execution of stagnation control and temporary stagnation of play, it becomes easier to draw attention to the attention regarding immersion. Also, the specific period is set longer than the execution period during which the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state). As a result, for example, even if a player who has little interest in calling attention to addiction sets the number of bets (number of bets) immediately after the end of stagnation control, the attention to addiction will not end within a specific period. continue to run without For this reason, it is possible to make the user feel uncomfortable that the alert regarding the immersion does not end, and increase interest in the alert regarding the immersion. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to addiction to a player who is not interested in the attention to addiction.

(14) The bonus game state (special state) includes a first bonus game state (first special state), a second bonus game state (first special state), and a single bonus game state (second special state). , there is. Among these, when the first bonus game state (or the second bonus game state) in which the number of obtainable medals (the number of game media) is larger than that in the single bonus game state occurs, Alert is executed. On the other hand, when a single bonus game state in which the number of obtainable medals is smaller than that in the first bonus game state (or second bonus game state) is generated, a warning regarding addiction is not executed. did. In this way, even if a single bonus game state in which the number of obtainable medals is small occurs, even if a player is alerted to the addiction, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the single bonus game state is generated, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by not calling attention to the immersion.

In addition, since the number of medals that can be obtained in the single bonus game state is small, even if the single bonus game state is generated, the number of medals that the player can obtain is small, and it is also considered that the effect of calling attention to addiction is weak. be done. On the other hand, since the number of obtainable medals is large in the first bonus game state (or second bonus game state), the number of medals obtained by the player is large, and it is considered that the effect of calling attention to addiction is strong. . Then, in a situation where the effect of calling attention to addiction is considered to be weak, the attention to addiction is not executed, and in a situation where the effect of calling attention to addiction is considered to be strong, the attention to addiction is executed. As a result, the effect of calling attention to addiction is strengthened and the attention to immersion can be effectively executed, as compared with the case where the attention is always called for addiction simply when the bonus game state is generated. can.

(15) While the number of variable games (games) in the single bonus game state (second special state) is one, the first bonus game state (first special state) and the second bonus game state (first special state) ), the number of variable games is greater than one. In this way, since the number of variable games is one in the single-bonus game state, the player may not notice that the single-bonus game state has occurred. In such a situation, if the player is alerted to the addiction, the player may not understand why the addiction was alerted, and the player may feel uncomfortable. By not calling the user's attention about immersion in such a situation, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of the alert about immersion.

(16) Final variation in the first bonus game state among the first bonus game state (first special state), second bonus game state (first special state) and single bonus game state (second special state) After the end of the game (game) and after the end of the final variation game in the second bonus game state, a warning regarding addiction is executed. Thus, after enjoying the first bonus game state or the second bonus game state, that is, after earning medals (game media) due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state or the second bonus game state, attention should be paid to addiction. By executing the alert, it is possible to enhance the effect of the alert regarding immersion.

(17) When shifting from the first advantageous effect state (first specific state) to the second advantageous effect state (second specific state), before the first variable game (game) in the second advantageous effect state to be shifted A call for attention regarding immersion is not executed. On the other hand, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the normal effect state (normal state), attention regarding immersion is executed before the first variation game in the normal effect state to which the transition is made. In this way, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the normal effect state, since attention is drawn to the immersion, it is possible to prevent the immersion and set a break for the transition to the normal effect state. , it is possible to call attention to the immersion without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, the situation of shifting from the first advantageous performance state to the second advantageous performance state, which is more advantageous than the first advantageous performance state, enhances the player's interest in the transition to the second advantageous performance state. It is also a situation where Therefore, by not calling attention to addiction, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to increase interest due to the execution of attention to addiction.

(18) When shifting from the second advantageous effect state (second specific state) to the first advantageous effect state (first specific state), before the first variable game (game) in the first advantageous effect state to be shifted A call for attention regarding immersion is not executed. In this way, when the transition is made in the advantageous production state (specific state), the advantageous production state continues. There is a possibility that it will become impossible to entertain. Therefore, in both the case of shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the second advantageous effect state and the case of shifting from the second advantageous effect state to the first advantageous effect state in the advantageous effect state, I tried not to execute the alert. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a series of advantageous effect states cannot be sufficiently enjoyed by executing a call for attention regarding immersion.

(19) When transitioning from the first advantageous effect state (first specific state) to the normal effect state (normal state), execution of the stagnation control is started after the final variation game (game) in the first advantageous effect state. A call for attention regarding the immersion is executed later, and after the execution of the call for attention regarding the immersion is started, the state shifts to a normal presentation state. In this way, by executing a call for attention regarding immersion after execution of stagnation control and temporary stagnation of play, it becomes easier to draw attention to the attention regarding immersion. In addition, since the execution of the attention alert related to immersion is started, it will shift to the normal production state, so by temporarily stagnating the play when the advantageous production state (specific state) ends and shifts to the normal production state It is also possible to calm the player and effectively call attention to the addiction.

(20) When the attention regarding the immersion is being executed, the effect display device 14 (effect executing means) that executes the attention regarding the immersion executes the appearance effect (specific effect) and the starry sky effect (specific effect). be done. The appearance effect and the starry sky effect are of high interest to the players because they are effects suggesting or notifying the degree of advantage related to the occurrence of an advantageous state such as a bonus game state or an advantageous effect state. In this way, by executing the performance (specific performance) in which the player's interest is high when the attention of the immersion is being executed, attention is drawn not only to the appearance performance and the starry sky performance, but also to the attention of the immersion. It is possible to effectively call attention to immersion.

(21) Starry sky effect (specific effect) is an effect that suggests or notifies an internal mode (internal control state). By executing such a starry sky effect and calling attention to immersion, it is easy to attract the eyes of the player who pays attention to what kind of internal mode it is, and it is effective to call such a player's attention to immersion. can run to Then, for example, it is possible to effectively make a player who has predicted or specified that the internal mode should be aware that he or she should be careful about becoming immersed in the game.

(22) Depending on the internal mode (internal control state), the determination rate of the upper limit number of games (ceiling number of times) required until the next advantageous state occurs differs. Therefore, the starry sky effect (specific effect) is an effect of suggesting or notifying the upper limit number of games required until the next advantageous state occurs. By executing such a starry sky presentation and a call for attention regarding immersion, it is easy to attract the eyes of a player who pays attention to the upper limit number of times of games required until the next advantageous state occurs. It is possible to effectively call attention to immersion in the hand. Then, for example, it is possible to effectively make a player who has predicted or specified the upper limit of the number of games required until the next advantageous state occurs recognize that he/she should be careful of becoming addicted.

(23) Appearance effect (specific effect) is an effect that suggests or notifies a set value. By executing such an appearance effect and calling attention to immersion, it is easy to attract the eyes of a player who pays attention to what kind of set values are set, and the player can be alerted to such immersion. can be executed effectively. Then, for example, it is possible to effectively make the player who has predicted or specified the set value recognize that he/she should be careful about becoming absorbed in the game.

(24) In addition to the execution of the attention to the immersion, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect are executed, so that the player is bored by the repeated execution of the attention to the immersion. can be suppressed.

(25) Many game arcades are equipped with a plurality of game machines. When the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets (number of bets) is 1 or more and the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated, the play shifts to another gaming machine. could be the situation. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 1 or more, the execution of the standby effect is started, and attention should be paid to immersion during the execution of the standby effect. Made it so that the summons can be executed. As a result, since it is possible to call attention to addiction to a player who moves to play on another gaming machine, it is possible to attract attention not only to the gaming machine that was being played but also to the next gaming machine to be played. can also be alerted, and it is possible to effectively alert about immersion.

(26) When the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets (number of bets) is 0, and the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated, the play shifts to another gaming machine. could be the situation. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 1 or more, the execution of the standby effect is started, and attention should be paid to immersion during the execution of the standby effect. Awakening is now executed. As a result, since it is possible to call attention to addiction to a player who moves to play on another gaming machine, it is possible to attract attention not only to the gaming machine that was being played but also to the next gaming machine to be played. can also be alerted, and effectively alerting about immersion can be executed.

(27) When the credit is 0 and the number of bets (number of bets) is 1 or more and the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated, the play shifts to another gaming machine. could be the situation. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 1 or more, the execution of the standby effect is started, and attention should be paid to immersion during the execution of the standby effect. Made it so that the summons can be executed. As a result, since it is possible to call attention to addiction to a player who moves to play on another gaming machine, it is possible to attract attention not only to the gaming machine that was being played but also to the next gaming machine to be played. can also be alerted, and it is possible to effectively alert about immersion.

(28) When the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets (number of bets) is 1 or more and the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated, the effect display device 14 (effect execution means) , the settlement effect relating to the settlement of game media is executed before the standby effect. For example, when the settlement performance is executed after the standby performance is executed after the settlement button 19 is operated, the time from the operation of the settlement button 19 to the execution of the settlement performance becomes long, and the settlement button 19 is pressed. There is a risk that the player will be made to think that the operation cannot be performed, or that the player will feel uncomfortable. However, when the settlement button 19 is operated, the execution of the settlement effect before the standby effect can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Also, before calling attention to the return of a storage medium such as a prepaid card, the effect display device 14 executes a settlement effect related to settlement of game media. By executing such a settlement effect, it is possible for the player to recognize that the medals have been settled by operating the settlement button 19 .

(29) Since there is a risk that the player who ends the play may forget to take out the storage medium such as the prepaid card, a warning regarding the return of the storage medium is executed after the settlement effect. As a result, it is possible to contribute to prevention of forgetting to take out the storage medium by executing not only the alert regarding the immersion, but also the alert regarding the return of the storage medium.

Further, by executing the attention regarding the return of the storage medium before the standby effect, the memory is more effectively stored compared to the case where the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is executed after the standby effect. It is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the medium.

(30) If a replay win is awarded, the number of bets (number of bets) is set, but since it is not subject to settlement, settlement processing (settlement control) is performed. However, the number of bets remains set. If the standby effect is executed in such a situation, there is a possibility that the play will end without the variable game being executed even though the variable game (game) can be executed. Therefore, by not executing the standby effect when the replay combination wins, it is possible to prevent the play from being terminated even though the variable game can be executed.

(31) Plural game machines are often installed in game arcades. A situation in which the settlement button 19 (a settlement operating means) is operated may be a situation in which play is shifted to another gaming machine. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the payout combination is won, the execution of the standby performance is started, and the attention of the immersion is executed during the execution of the standby performance. As a result, since it is possible to call attention to addiction to a player who moves to play on another gaming machine, it is possible to attract attention not only to the gaming machine that was being played but also to the next gaming machine to be played. Since it is possible to call attention to also, it is possible to effectively call attention to immersion. However, if a replay win is awarded, the number of bets (number of bets) will be set, but it will not be subject to settlement, so it is assumed that settlement processing (settlement control) has been performed. However, the number of bets remains set. If the standby effect is executed in such a situation, there is a possibility that the play will end without the variable game being executed even though the variable game (game) can be executed. Therefore, by not executing the standby effect when the replay combination wins, it is possible to prevent the play from being terminated even though the variable game can be executed.

(32) When the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated after the replay combination is won in the variable game (game), when the settlement button 19 is operated after the payout combination is won in the variable game, In any of the above, the effect display device 14 (effect executing means) executes a settlement effect related to the settlement of game media. By executing such a settlement effect, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game media have been settled by operating the settlement button 19 .

(33) When the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated after the payout combination is won in the variable game (game), the effect display device 14 (effect execution means) settles the game media before the standby effect. is executed. For example, when the settlement performance is executed after the standby performance is executed after the settlement button 19 is operated, the time from the operation of the settlement button 19 to the execution of the settlement performance becomes long, and the settlement button 19 is pressed. There is a risk that the player will be made to think that the operation is not possible, or that the player will feel uncomfortable. However, when the settlement button 19 is operated, the execution of the settlement effect before the standby effect can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(34) It is possible to prevent immersion by calling attention to immersion. Then, when the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated during execution of attention calling for immersion, execution of attention calling for immersion is finished and attention calling for return of the storage medium is executed. By the way, in many cases, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the gaming arcade. A situation in which the settlement button 19 is operated may be a situation in which play is shifted to another gaming machine. Then, when the settlement button 19 is operated during the execution of the attention to the immersion, the execution of the attention to the immersion is finished and the attention to the return of the storage medium is executed. As a result, while suppressing addiction by issuing a warning regarding addiction, by executing a warning regarding the return of a storage medium such as a prepaid card, the player who ends the play does not forget to remove the storage medium. can also be suppressed. In this way, even in a scene where attention is being drawn for immersion, if the adjustment button 19 is operated, by executing the attention that matches the situation that the adjustment button 19 is operated, It is possible to effectively issue a warning regarding immersion and a warning regarding return of the storage medium.

(35) During the execution of the standby effect, a call for attention regarding immersion is executed. When the standby effect is being executed, it is conceivable that the player who starts playing is visually recognizing the standby effect. By calling attention to immersion during the execution of such a waiting effect, it is possible to call attention to addiction to the player who is about to start playing.

(36) When the menu button MB as a predetermined operating means is operated while the attention is being called for the immersion during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the attention for the immersion ends. Therefore, during the execution of the standby effect, the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB is executed after the execution of the call for attention regarding the immersion. As a result, it is possible to prevent a scene in which the execution of the call for attention regarding the immersion ends due to the operation of the menu button MB.

(37) If the menu button MB as a predetermined operating means is operated during execution of the standby effect, the execution of the standby effect is also terminated. For this reason, during execution of the standby performance, the performance related to the operation of the menu button MB is executed after the execution of the attention arousal regarding the immersion, so that the standby performance is executed for a long time and the game is played by the standby performance. The period during which the player is entertained can also be lengthened, and the execution of the standby performance facilitates improvement of interest.

(38) Since the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB as a predetermined operation means, the menu button MB is operated during execution of the standby effect, and after adjusting the volume, the variable game (game) can be executed. That is, since the player can play the game at a sound volume that suits his or her taste, it is possible to effectively increase interest in the game.

(39) In the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB as a predetermined operation means, it is notified that the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB. Therefore, since a player who does not want to adjust the sound volume does not operate the menu button MB, it is possible to suppress unnecessary operation of the menu button MB even though the player does not want to adjust the sound volume. . In other words, it is possible to effectively prevent the menu button MB from being operated while the attention is being called for the addiction and the execution of the attention for the addiction is terminated.

(40) If the content of the alert regarding addiction executed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the alert regarding immersion executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) are different, respectively. There is a risk of misrecognition, such as calling attention to a different event. However, by making the content of the alert regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect the same as the content of the alert regarding immersion executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the It is possible to issue a warning regarding immersion, and suppress misrecognition of the warning.

(41) If the contents of the alert regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect and the contents of the attention regarding immersion executed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) are different, respectively. There is a risk of misrecognition, such as calling attention to a different event. However, by making the content of the alert regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect the same as the content of the alert regarding immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, the It is possible to issue a warning regarding immersion, and suppress misrecognition of the warning.

(42) If the content of the alert regarding immersion executed after the final variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is during execution of the standby effect or the final variable game in the bonus game state (special state) If the content of the alert regarding the immersion to be executed later is different, there is a risk of misrecognition, such as the fact that each alert is about a different phenomenon. However, the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state are replaced with the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect and after the final variation game in the bonus game. The content was the same as the alert for addiction. Thereby, it is possible to commonly call attention to the immersion, and to suppress misrecognition of the attention.

(43) After the payout combination wins in the final variable game (game) in the bonus game state (special state), the attention regarding immersion is issued until at least a specific time elapses. is continuously executed, it is possible to effectively call attention to immersion after the end of the bonus game state. In addition, it is possible to temporarily suspend play after the bonus game state ends, but when a predetermined waiting time elapses without the number of bets (number of bets) being set, a waiting effect is executed to call attention to immersion. executed. As a result, even a player who has temporarily interrupted the play after the end of the bonus game state can be alerted to the addiction in the standby performance, and can be effectively alerted to the addiction.

(44) After the payout combination wins in the last variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state), the attention regarding the immersion is issued until at least the specified time elapses. is continuously executed, it is possible to effectively call attention to the immersion after the end of the advantageous effect state. In addition, it is possible to temporarily suspend play after the end of the advantageous effect state, but when a predetermined waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets (number of bets), the standby effect is executed and a warning about immersion is made. executed. As a result, it is possible to call attention to the immersion in the standby performance even for the player who has temporarily interrupted the play after the end of the advantageous performance state, and to effectively call attention to the immersion.

(45) When a replaying role wins in the final variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state), a warning regarding immersion is executed after the final variable game in the advantageous effect state. After that, the alert regarding the immersion is continuously executed until at least a specific time elapses. On the other hand, even after that, even if the predetermined waiting time elapses, the waiting effect is not executed. By the way, if a replay is awarded when a replay combination wins, the number of bets (number of bets) is set, and a situation becomes possible for a variable game. If the standby effect is executed in such a situation, there is a risk that the variable game can no longer be executed even though the variable game could be executed. be. For this reason, after the replay role wins in the final variable game in the advantageous effect state, the situation in which the variable game can be executed is automatically changed by not executing the standby effect even if the predetermined standby time has passed. It is possible to suppress things that make you think that the process has ended.

(46) The mode of calling attention to addiction executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state). As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to the addiction and suppress the addiction according to each situation during execution of the standby effect and after the bonus game state is finished.

(47) The mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state). As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to the immersion and suppress the immersion according to each situation during execution of the standby effect and after the end of the advantageous effect state.

(48) The mode of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variable game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) is executed after the final variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state). It is different from the form of calling attention to addiction. As a result, after the bonus game state and after the advantageous effect state are ended, it is possible to effectively call attention to the addiction and suppress the addiction.

(49) In a gaming machine employing a transmissive display as the effect display device 14, a predetermined alert image (for example, an alert image TGa) is displayed in a display area different from the transmissive area 14a (reel visual recognition area). A warning regarding the immersion is executed. In this manner, since a predetermined attention-calling image is displayed in a display area different from the transmissive area 14a, it is possible to prevent the attention-calling regarding the immersion from becoming an obstacle and causing discomfort. Further, the line of sight of the player visually recognizing the reels toward the reel can be easily shifted to the predetermined attention calling image, and by changing the line of sight, the degree of attention to the predetermined attention calling image can be increased, and the player can call attention to immersion. can be executed effectively.

(50) When the predetermined effect area in which attention is called for the immersion is executed and the action area of the heart movable body 25 corresponding to the specific movable body overlaps, the heart can be moved when the attention for the immersion is executed. When the body 25 moves, there is a possibility that the attention regarding the immersion cannot be visually recognized and the attention regarding the immersion cannot be sufficiently executed. Therefore, the predetermined performance area in which attention is drawn regarding the immersion is executed and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 are prevented from overlapping. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that the movement of the heart movable body 25 makes it impossible to visually recognize the attention about the immersion, and the sufficient attention about the immersion cannot be executed, and the attention about the immersion is effectively executed. be able to.

(51) When viewed from the front, the width of a predetermined alert image (for example, the alert image TGa) is longer than the width of one of the plurality of reels 13a to 13c. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to direct the line of sight to the predetermined attention calling image rather than to the reel, and to effectively call attention to immersion.

(52) By performing the special visual recognition control, the backlight BL is extinguished, making it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c. In this way, by making the reels 13a to 13c difficult to visually recognize by performing the special visual recognition control, the player's line of sight is easily shifted to a predetermined attention calling image, thereby effectively executing attention calling for immersion. can be done.

(53) A single-color image is displayed in the transmissive area 14a (reel visual recognition area) by performing the special visual recognition control, making it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c. In this way, by making the reels 13a to 13c difficult to visually recognize by performing the special visual recognition control, the player's line of sight is easily shifted to a predetermined attention calling image, thereby effectively executing attention calling for immersion. can be done.

(54) After the final variable game (game) in the bonus game state (special state), the predetermined effect area in which attention is drawn to the addiction is executed is the first special win number effect (special win number effect) or the first special win number effect (special win number effect). If it overlaps with the area where the 2 special winning number effect (special winning number effect) is executed, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to sufficiently draw attention to the immersion. Therefore, after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the predetermined effect area in which attention is drawn to the immersion is executed and the region in which the first special win number effect and the second special win number effect are executed are not overlapped. did. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first special winning number effect or the second special winning number effect is executed, and the attention to the addiction cannot be visually recognized and the attention to the addiction cannot be sufficiently executed. It is possible to effectively call attention to immersion.

(55) After the final variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state), if the predetermined effect area in which attention is drawn regarding immersion is executed overlaps with the region in which the specific win number effect is executed, enough There is a possibility that it may not be possible to issue a warning regarding immersion. Therefore, after the final variable game in the advantageous effect state, the predetermined effect area in which attention is called for the immersion and the area in which the specific winning number effect is executed are not overlapped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that the attention about immersion cannot be sufficiently executed due to the execution of the specific acquisition number effect, and the attention about immersion can be effectively executed. can do.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the gaming machine will be described. In addition, the structure similar to 1st Embodiment attaches|subjects the same code|symbol as 1st Embodiment, and abbreviate|omits about the detailed description and drawing.

In the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding immersion is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding immersion is executed. Further, in the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding immersion is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first variable game in the advantageous effect state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding immersion is executed.

Further, in the first embodiment, when shifting from the preparation effect state to the advantageous effect state, the state is shifted to the first advantageous effect state. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when shifting from the preparation effect state to the advantageous effect state, the state is shifted to the advantageous effect state determined by lottery out of the first advantageous effect state and the second advantageous effect state.

Specifically, in the second embodiment, when the main control CPU 40a stores the advantageous shift permission information in the main control RAM 40c, the types of the advantageous effect state at the start of the advantageous effect state are set to the first advantageous effect state and the second advantageous effect state. It is determined by lottery from among the advantageous production states. Then, when the main control CPU 40a determines the type of the advantageous effect state at the start of the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a provides information (hereinafter referred to as start time advantageous type information) that can specify the type of the determined advantageous effect state. It is stored in the main control RAM 40c.

In addition, in the effect state transition process, when the promotion replay role is won in the preparation effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets the effect state flag according to the start time advantageous type information stored in the main control RAM 40c. Update value. Specifically, when the first advantageous effect state can be identified from the starting advantageous type information, the main control CPU 40a sets a value that allows the first advantageous effect state to be identified in the effect state flag. On the other hand, when the second advantageous effect state can be identified from the start time advantageous type information, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of identifying the second advantageous effect state to the effect state flag. In addition, at this time, even if any of the value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state and the value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state is set in the effect state flag, the main control CPU 40a determines the remaining advantageous effect state. "30 times" is stored in the main control RAM 40c as the number of stays. Further, only when a value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state is set in the effect state flag, the main control CPU 40a stores "10 times" in the main control RAM 40c as the second advantageous stay count.

Here, based on FIG. 27, special stagnation processing in the second embodiment will be described.
In the specific stagnation process of the second embodiment, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the first bonus effect state starts (step S301). In step S301, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the first bonus combination has won in the end processing (step S122) and the effect state flag has been set to a value that can specify the first bonus effect state. Determining that the first bonus effect state starts in step S301 corresponds to determining that it is before the start of the first variation game in the first bonus game state.

Also, when the first bonus effect state starts (step S301: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of a first stagnation start command (step S302). In the process of outputting the first stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs processing for measuring the opening time (step S303). In step S303, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined opening time and waits until the opening time elapses. Then, when the opening time has elapsed and the opening time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the first stagnation end command (step S304), and ends the special stagnation process. In the process of outputting the first stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation end command in the output buffer.

When the first bonus effect state does not start (step S301: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the second bonus effect state starts (step S305). In step S305, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the second bonus combination has won in the end processing (step S122) and the effect state flag has been set to a value that can specify the second bonus effect state. Determining that the second bonus effect state starts in step S305 corresponds to determining that the first variation game in the second bonus game state is started before.

When the second bonus effect state starts (step S305: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of a second stagnation start command (step S306). In the process of outputting the second stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs processing for measuring the opening time (step S307). In step S307, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined opening time and waits until the opening time elapses. Then, when the opening time has passed and the opening time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of a second stagnation end command (step S308), and ends the special stagnation process. In the process of outputting the second stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation end command in the output buffer.

When the second bonus effect state does not start (step S305: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the advantageous effect state starts (step S309). In step S309, the main control CPU 40a sets a value that can specify the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state to the effect state flag when the promotion replay role wins in the end process (step S122). determine whether it did. Determining that the advantageous effect state starts in step S309 corresponds to determining that the first variable game in the advantageous effect state starts before starting.

When the advantageous effect state does not start (step S309: NO), the main control CPU 40a ends the special stagnation process. On the other hand, when the advantageous effect state starts (step S309: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the third stagnation start command (step S310). In the process of outputting the third stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation start command in the output buffer. The third stagnation start command includes a special third stagnation start command and a non-special third stagnation start command. Then, when the value that can specify the second advantageous effect state is set to the effect state flag with the fact that the promoted replay combination has won, in step S310 the main control CPU 40a outputs a special third stagnation start command to the output buffer. store in On the other hand, when a value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state is set to the effect state flag in response to the winning of the promotion replay combination, the main control CPU 40a outputs a non-special third stagnation start command in step S310. Store in buffer.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs processing for measuring the opening time (step S311). In step S311, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined opening time and waits until the opening time elapses. Then, when the opening time has elapsed and the opening time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the third stagnation end command (step S312), and ends the special stagnation process. In the process of outputting the third stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation end command in the output buffer.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S302 to S304, the processing of steps S306 to S308, and the processing of steps S310 to S312 correspond to stagnation control. In the following description, the execution of the processes of steps S302 to S304, the execution of the processes of steps S306 to S308, and the execution of the processes of steps S310 to S312 are referred to as "stagnation control is executed. There is a case that it will be done. In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a executes the stagnation control by performing any one of the processes of steps S302 to S304, the processes of steps S306 to S308, and the processes of steps S310 to S312. A function as a control means is realized. Further, in the present embodiment, among the processing of steps S302 to S304, the processing of steps S306 to S308, and the processing of steps S310 to S312, in the processing of steps S303, S307, and S311, the predetermined opening time Measurement control, that is, measurement control of a predetermined opening time is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the processing of steps S302 to S304 and the processing of steps S306 to S308 are performed before the first variation game is started in the bonus game state corresponding to the special state, It can be seen that the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started. Similarly, in the present embodiment, since the processing of steps S310 to S312 is performed before the first variation game is started in the advantageous effect state corresponding to the specific state, the first game in the specific state is It can be seen that stagnation control is executed before it is started.

In the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed, the effect display device 14 executes the opening effect. In the slot machine 10, an appearance effect may be executed in the effect display device 14 during execution of the opening effect.

Next, various opening effects will be described.
After the processing of steps S302 to S304 of the special stagnation process is performed by the main control CPU 40a and the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the opening effect in the first bonus effect state. . In addition, after the processing of steps S304 to S306 of the special stagnation process is performed by the main control CPU 40a and the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the opening effect in the second bonus effect state. . Further, the main control CPU 40a performs the processing of steps S310 to S312 of the special stagnation process, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes an opening effect in an advantageous effect state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), before the start of the first variation game in the first bonus game state, the effect display device 14 displays a warning image TGa to call attention to immersion. be. That is, the warning regarding addiction executed before the start of the first variable game in the first bonus game state is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play." ] is displayed. In addition, the warning regarding addiction executed before the start of the first variation game in the first bonus game state is "Beware of addiction." ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image TGa corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Further, the alert image TGa is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGa is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as the reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. In this manner, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGa is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGa is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the display area where the alert image TGa is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGa in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, the opening effect executed before the start of the first variation game in the first bonus game state is referred to as the first opening effect. In the first opening effect, the effect display device 14 displays the image OP1. The image OP1 is "First bonus game state start! ] is an image containing characters (character information). Note that the image OP1 displayed when the first opening effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus gaming state, a specific image displayed before the start of the first variation game (for example, image OP1 ) continues to be displayed without movement, and the movement of the particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the special state is started It continues to be displayed without motion, and the motion of that particular image is stalled.

When the first opening effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 simulating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the rear side of the attention calling image TGa. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), before the start of the first variation game in the second bonus game state, the effect display device 14 displays a warning image TGc to call attention to immersion. be. That is, the warning regarding addiction executed before the start of the first variable game in the second bonus game state is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play." ] is displayed. In addition, the warning regarding addiction that is executed before the start of the first variation game in the second bonus game state is "Beware of addiction." ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the caution image TGc corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image TGc is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGc is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGc is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGc is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the display area where the alert image TGc is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGc in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGc is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, the opening effect executed before the start of the first variation game in the second bonus game state is referred to as the second opening effect. In the second opening effect, the effect display device 14 displays the image OP2. The image OP2 is "Start of the second bonus game state! ] is an image containing characters (character information). Note that the image OP2 displayed when the second opening effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus gaming state, a specific image displayed before the start of the first variation game (for example, the image OP2 ) continues to be displayed without action, and the action of the particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the special state is started It continues to be displayed without motion, and the motion of that particular image is stalled.

When the second opening effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the first character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH1 simulating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed on the back side of the attention calling image TGc. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

As shown in FIG. 28(c), prior to the start of the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state, the effect display device 14 displays a warning image TGe to call attention to the immersion. be. That is, the alert regarding immersion executed before the start of the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play." ] is displayed. In addition, a warning regarding addiction that is executed before the start of the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state is "Beware of addiction." ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image TGe corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Also, the alert image TGe is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention calling image TGe is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. display area. In this way, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGe is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGe is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGe in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGe is displayed is a display area different from the transmission area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, the opening effect executed before the first variable game is started in the first advantageous effect state is referred to as the third opening effect. In the third opening effect, the effect display device 14 displays an image OP3. The image OP3 is "entering the first advantageous effect state! ] is an image containing characters (character information). Note that the image OP3 displayed when the third opening effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first variation game in the advantageous effect state, the specific image displayed before the start of the first variation game (for example, the image OP3 ) continues to be displayed without action, and the action of the particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first game in the specific state, the specific image displayed before the start of the first game in the specific state is It continues to be displayed without motion, and the motion of that particular image is stalled.

When the third opening effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the second character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH2 simulating the second character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH2 is displayed on the back side of the attention calling image TGe. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

As shown in FIG. 28(d), before the start of the first variable game in the second advantageous effect state, the effect display device 14 displays a warning image TGf to call attention to immersion. be. That is, the alert regarding immersion executed before the start of the first variable game in the second advantageous effect state is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play." ] is displayed. In addition, the warning regarding addiction that is executed before the start of the first variation game in the second advantageous effect state is "Beware of addiction." ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the caution image TGf corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel.

Also, the attention calling image TGf is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention calling image TGf is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmission type display. display area. In this manner, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGf is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGf is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alert image TGf is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area where the attention-calling image TGf is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, the opening effect executed before the start of the first variable game in the second advantageous effect state is referred to as the fourth opening effect. In the fourth opening effect, the heart movable body 25 operates. Since the attention-calling image TGf is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25, even if the heart-shaped movable body 25 moves in a front view, the heart-shaped movable body 25 is displayed as the attention-calling image TGf. does not cover

In the fourth opening effect, the effect display device 14 displays an image OP4. The image OP4 is "entering the second advantageous effect state! ] is an image containing characters (character information). The image OP4 displayed when the fourth opening effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first variation game in the advantageous effect state, the specific image displayed before the start of the first variation game (for example, the image OP4 ) continues to be displayed without action, and the action of the particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first game in the specific state, the specific image displayed before the start of the first game in the specific state is It continues to be displayed without motion, and the motion of that particular image is stalled.

When the fourth opening effect is executed, if the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the third character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 simulating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the attention calling image TGf. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

Controls related to various opening effects will be described below.
First, control related to the first opening effect will be described.
When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGa is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S302 of the special stagnation process, the first stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. After starting the execution of the stagnation control, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. Further, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP1 is displayed.

Further, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the performance contents of the appearance performance, and controls the performance display device 14 so that the appearance performance of the determined performance contents is executed. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19(a). Note that the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect when the second opening effect to the fourth opening effect described below are executed in the same manner as when the first opening effect is executed. do. Further, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. As in the first embodiment, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special viewing control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed in at least the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14. FIG.

When the first opening effect is executed, that is, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGa and then starts measuring the specific time. Then, when the variable game start command is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGa at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S303 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first opening effect ends. to control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP1 and the image related to the appearance effect (for example, the image CH3) ends, the alert image TGa continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, a special When the game is started for the first time in the state, the alert regarding the immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the variable game start command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the alert image TGa ends when the variable game start command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the special state is started after a specific period of time since the execution of the call for attention regarding immersion is started before the first game in the special state is started, Execution of the alert regarding immersion ends. By the way, even if the number of bets is set before or after the specific period of time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific period of time has started, the first opening effect continues to be executed without ending. The alert regarding immersion continues to be executed.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the first opening effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first opening effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGa as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a will generate an alert image when ending the first opening effect. The display of TGa is also terminated. As in the first embodiment, when a settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of a warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed. Furthermore, when the waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets after that, the waiting effect is executed in the effect display device 14, and attention is drawn to the immersion during the execution of the standby effect.

Next, control relating to the second opening effect will be described.
When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGc is displayed. In this embodiment, after the second stagnation start command is stored in the output buffer by the main control CPU 40a in step S306 of the special stagnation process, the second stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. After starting the execution of the stagnation control, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. Further, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP2 is displayed. Further, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the performance contents of the appearance performance, and controls the performance display device 14 so that the appearance performance of the determined performance contents is executed. Further, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

When the second opening effect is executed, that is, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGc and then starts measuring the specific time. Then, when the variable game start command is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGc at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. In this embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S307 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second opening effect ends. to control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP2 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the alert image TGc continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, a special When the game is started for the first time in the state, the alert regarding the immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the variable game start command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the alert image TGc ends when the variable game start command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the special state is started after a specific period of time since the execution of the call for attention regarding immersion is started before the first game in the special state is started, Execution of the alert regarding immersion ends. Incidentally, even if the number of bets is set before or after the specific period of time has elapsed since the measurement of the specific period of time has started, the second opening effect continues to be executed without ending. The alert regarding immersion continues to be executed.

Also, when the settlement command is input during execution of the second opening effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second opening effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGc as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a will generate an alert image when ending the second opening effect. The display of TGc is also terminated. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed. Furthermore, when the waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets after that, the waiting effect is executed in the effect display device 14, and attention is drawn to the immersion during the execution of the standby effect.

Next, control related to the third opening effect will be described.
When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGe is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S310 of the special stagnation process, the non-special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed.

When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP3 is displayed. Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. do. Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

Also, when executing the third opening effect, that is, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGe and then starts measuring the specific time. Then, when the variable game start command is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGe at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S311 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third opening effect ends. to control. As a result, the effect display device 14 ends the display of the image OP3 and the image related to the appearance effect, but continues to display the alert image TGe. Thus, in the present embodiment, before the start of the first game in the specific state, the specific When the game is started for the first time in the state, the alert regarding the immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the variable game start command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the alert image TGe ends when the variable game start command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the specific state is started after the specific period from the start of the execution of the call for attention regarding immersion before the first game in the specific state is started, Execution of the alert regarding immersion ends.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the third opening effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third opening effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGe as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a will display the warning image when ending the third opening effect. The display of TGe is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed. However, the third opening effect is executed when control is performed to the first advantageous effect state with the winning of the promotion replay role as a trigger. Therefore, when the third opening effect is executed, since it is a situation in which a replay is granted, the payout effect and the attention regarding the return of the storage medium are executed on the condition that the settlement button 19 is operated. After that, the waiting effect is not executed even if the waiting time has passed.

Next, control relating to the fourth opening effect will be described.
When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGf is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S310 of the special stagnation process, the special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. , after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed.

When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP4 is displayed. Further, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. In addition, when a special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 and causes the heart movable body 25 to operate.

When executing the fourth opening effect, that is, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGf and then starts measuring the specific time. Then, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGf at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S311 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth opening effect ends. to control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP4 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the alert image TGf continues to be displayed. At this time, the heart movable body 25 moves to the origin 25a and returns to the origin 25a. Thus, in the present embodiment, before the start of the first game in the specific state, the specific When the game is started for the first time in the state, the alert regarding the immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the variable game start command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the alert image TGf ends when the variable game start command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the specific state is started after the specific period from the start of the execution of the call for attention regarding immersion before the first game in the specific state is started, Execution of the alert regarding immersion ends.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the fourth opening effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth opening effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGf as well. Note that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a will display the attention image when ending the fourth opening effect. The display of TGf is also terminated. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed. However, the fourth opening effect is executed when the second advantageous effect state is controlled with the winning of the promoted replay role as a trigger. Therefore, when the fourth opening effect is executed, it is a situation in which a replay is granted, and therefore, on the condition that the payment button 19 is operated, the payment effect and the attention regarding the return of the storage medium are executed. After that, the waiting effect is not executed even if the waiting time has passed.

Here, a description will be given of calling attention to the immersion executed in the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment.
The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to call attention (shown in FIG. 15(d)) regarding immersion by displaying the attention image GT3. In addition, the slot machine 10 provides an alert (shown in FIG. 28(a)) relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGa, and an alert image TGc relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGc. Alert (shown in FIG. 28(b)) and are configured to be executable. In addition, the slot machine 10 provides an alert (shown in FIG. 28(c)) relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGe, and an alert image TGf relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGf. Attention (shown in FIG. 28(d)) is configured to be executable. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding the immersion executed by displaying the attention image GT3 corresponds to the attention regarding the immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding addiction executed by displaying the attention image TGa is the attention regarding addiction executed before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started. Equivalent to evocation. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding addiction that is executed by displaying the attention image TGc is the attention regarding addiction that is executed before the start of the first variation game in the second bonus game state. Equivalent to evocation. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding the immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGe and the attention regarding the immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGf are performed in the advantageous effect state. This corresponds to a warning regarding immersion executed before the first variable game is started.

All of the alert images GT3, TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play. ] (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). In other words, the contents of the call to attention regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect and before the start of the first variable game in the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state and the advantageous effect state are as follows: “Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] is displayed. In addition, during the execution of the standby effect and before the start of the first variable game in the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state and the advantageous effect state, the contents of the alert regarding the immersion are: “Be careful of getting addicted. ] is displayed.

In this way, the contents of the alert regarding the addiction executed during execution of the standby performance are the same as the contents of the alert regarding the immersion executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game. In other words, the contents of the alert regarding the addiction executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game are the same as the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the standby performance. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when a single bonus game is generated among the bonus games, the attention regarding addiction is not executed. In the present embodiment, the content of the attention regarding addiction executed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the attention regarding immersion executed before the first variation game in the specific bonus game is started. It can be said that there is.

Further, the contents of the attention to the immersion executed during the execution of the standby performance are the same as the contents of the attention to the immersion executed before the start of the first variation game in the advantageous performance state. In other words, the contents of the alert regarding the addiction executed before the start of the first variable game in the advantageous effect state are the same as the contents of the alert regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect. In addition, the content of the alert regarding the addiction executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game state relates to the immersion executed before the start of the first variation game in the advantageous effect state. It is the same as the content of the alert. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the addiction executed before the start of the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is the immersion executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game state. It is the same as the content of the alert regarding

As described above, in the slot machine 10, during execution of the standby effect, and before the start of the first variation game in the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state, and the advantageous effect state, The contents of the alerts regarding immersion are common and the same. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(d) and FIGS. It differs from the position where TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed. Also, the size of the attention-calling image GT3 displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention-calling images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image GT3 is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention-calling images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed in the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters (character information) included in the alert image GT3 is different from the typeface of the characters (character information) included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the color of characters (so-called character color) included in the alert image GT3 is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the size of characters included in the alert image GT3 is different from the size of characters included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf.

Note that, as in the first embodiment, the image displayed when attention is drawn regarding immersion is executed with respect to the displayed position, size, displayed display area, typeface of characters included in the image, and characters included in the image. If at least one of the color of the characters included in the image and the size of the characters included in the image is different, it can be said that the mode of calling attention to the immersion is different.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed during execution of the standby effect is to call attention to immersion executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started. different from the aspect of In other words, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed before the start of the first variable game in the bonus game state is different from the mode of calling attention to addiction executed during execution of the standby effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is the aspect of calling attention to immersion executed before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started. different. In other words, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed before the start of the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby performance.

As shown in FIGS. 28(a) to 28(d), the positions where the attention-calling images TGa and TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 are the positions where the attention-calling images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. different from Also, the sizes of the attention-calling images TGa and TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 are different from the sizes of the attention-calling images TGe and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling images TGa and TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution images TGa and TGc is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution images TGe and TGf. In addition, the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started is performed before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started. is also different from the mode of calling attention regarding immersion executed before. In other words, the aspect of calling attention to the addiction executed before the first variation game is started in the bonus gaming state is the addiction executed before the first variation game is started in the advantageous effect state. It is different from the mode of calling attention to. As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to addiction performed before the first game in the specific state is started is performed before the first game in the special state is started. It is different from the mode of calling attention to addiction.

As shown in FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b), the position where the attention calling image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the attention calling image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14. FIG. Also, the size of the attention calling image TGa displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention calling image TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGa is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGc. Also, the color of the characters included in the caution image TGa is different from the color of the characters included in the caution image TGc. In addition, the size of characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGc.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to addiction executed before the start of the first variation game in the first bonus game state is the first variation game in the second bonus game state. It is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion that is executed before starting. In other words, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed before the start of the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state is performed before the start of the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state. It is different from the mode of calling attention to the executed immersion. In this embodiment, the first bonus stop number corresponds to the first special display result, and the first bonus game state corresponds to the first special state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second bonus stop number corresponds to the second special display result, and the second bonus game state corresponds to the second special state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to immersion executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the first game in the first special state is started is the first time in the second special state It is different from the mode of calling attention to addiction which is executed after execution of the stagnation control is started before the game is started.

As shown in FIGS. 28(c) and 28(d), the position where the attention calling image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the attention calling image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14. FIG. Also, the size of the attention calling image TGe displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention calling image TGf displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGe is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGf. Also, the color of the characters included in the caution image TGe is different from the color of the characters included in the caution image TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert image TGe is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to immersion executed before the start of the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state is the first variable game in the second advantageous effect state. It is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion that is executed before starting. In other words, the aspect of calling attention to immersion that is executed before the first variable game in the second advantageous effect state is started is performed before the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state is started. It is different from the mode of calling attention to the executed immersion. That is, in this embodiment, the first advantageous effect state corresponds to the first specified effect state, and the second advantageous effect state corresponds to the second specified effect state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to immersion executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the first game in the first effect specific state is started is the same as in the second effect specific state. It is different from the form of calling attention to addiction which is executed after execution of the stagnation control is started before the game is started for the first time.

Next, based on FIGS. 29(a) to 29(c), the case where the first bonus combination is won and the first bonus game state is generated, and the single bonus combination is won and the single bonus game state is generated. and the case where the promotion replay combination wins and the control is performed to the first advantageous effect state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when the first bonus combination is won in the variable game, the first bonus game state is generated, and the first variable game in the first bonus game state is started. Execution of the stagnation control is started at the timing t31 before. In the stagnation control started at timing t31, a predetermined opening time measurement process is performed, and the stagnation control is continued at least during the opening time. Further, when execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t31, the first opening effect is executed. At this time, an alert image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and an alert regarding the immersion is executed. It is also assumed that the start lever 20 is operated by operating the bet button 18 at timing t32 before the opening time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t32, since the stagnation control is being executed, it is not possible to set the number of bets or start the variable game.

Further, when the start lever 20 is operated after the number of bets is set at a timing t33 which is after the opening time has passed from the timing t31 and before the specific time has passed from the timing t31, the first bonus game is played. The first variation game in the state is started, and the execution of the first opening effect is finished. At this time, the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the first bonus effect state. However, from timing t31 to timing t34 when a specific period of time elapses, the effect display device 14 continues to display the attention calling image TGa, and continues to execute attention calling regarding immersion.

On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated after the number of bets is set at timing t35 after the opening time has passed since timing t31 and after the specific time has passed since timing t31, the first bonus The first variation game in the gaming state is started, and the execution of the first opening effect is finished. At this time, the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the first bonus effect state. In addition, when the execution of the first opening effect ends, the display of the attention-calling image TGa also ends, and the attention-calling regarding the immersion ends.

Incidentally, when the waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets even after a specific time elapses from the timing t31, the execution of the waiting effect is started. Then, during execution of the standby effect, the attention calling image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 to call attention to the immersion. In this case, since the first opening performance continues to be executed until the standby time elapses, the attention calling image TGa continues to be displayed on the performance display device 14, and the attention to the immersion continues to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), when a single bonus combination is won in a variation game executed under control in the normal effect state, control is effected in the single bonus game state, but the effect state is the normal effect state. is continuously controlled. The opening effect is not executed before the start of the variable game in the single bonus game state. Further, the stagnation control is not executed before the variable game is started in the single bonus gaming state. Further, before the start of the variable game in the single-bonus gaming state, the call for attention regarding immersion is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b), in the slot machine 10, the stagnation control is executed before the first variation game is started in the first bonus game state, while the single bonus game Stagnation control is not executed before the state variation game is started. In addition, in the slot machine 10, before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started, attention regarding immersion is executed, and before the variation game in the single bonus game state is started. The alert regarding immersion is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), when the promotion replay role wins in the variable game and is controlled to the first advantageous effect state, the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state is started. Execution of the stagnation control is started at the previous timing t41. It should be noted that when the promotion replay wins, the replay is awarded and the number of bets is set.

In the stagnation control started at timing t41, a predetermined opening time measurement process is performed, and the stagnation control is continued at least during the opening time. Further, when execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t41, the third opening effect is executed. At this time, an alert image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and an alert regarding the immersion is executed. Also, assume that the start lever 20 is operated at timing t42 before the opening time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t42, the stagnation control is being executed, so the variable game cannot be started.

Further, when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t43 after the opening time has passed since timing t41 and before the specific time has passed since timing t41, the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state is started. It is started, and the execution of the third opening effect ends. At this time, the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the first advantageous effect state. However, from timing t41 to timing t44 when a specific time elapses, the effect display device 14 continues to display the attention-calling image TGe, and continues to execute attention-calling regarding immersion.

On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t45 after the opening time has passed since timing t41 and after the specific time has passed since timing t41, the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state. is started, and the execution of the third opening effect ends. At this time, the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the first advantageous effect state. In addition, the display of the alert image TGe is also terminated with the completion of the execution of the third opening effect, and the attention regarding the immersion is terminated. Incidentally, even if the standby time elapses after the specific time elapses from the timing t41, the standby effect is not executed because the replay is provided.

According to the second embodiment, in addition to the effects (5), (14), (15), (23), (25) to (39) and (49) to (53) of the first embodiment, the following have a similar effect.
(56) The stagnation control is executed before the start of the first variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) generated after the bonus stop (special display result) is derived, and the stagnation is performed. After the execution of control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. In this way, after the stagnation control is executed and the play is temporarily interrupted before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started, the attention of the addiction is executed, whereby the attention of the addiction is called. can be executed effectively. By the way, when the bonus game state is generated, the player's interest is directed toward the bonus game state, and there is a high possibility that the player lacks composure. In this way, in a situation where the player is likely to lose his composure, the stagnation control is executed to temporarily interrupt the play, and then the attention to the addiction is executed, thereby alerting the player to the addiction. can be executed more effectively.

(57) A form of calling attention to immersion executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the first variation game (game) is started in the first bonus game state, and in the second bonus game state The mode of calling attention to immersion executed after execution of stagnation control is started prior to the start of the first variable game is made different. As a result, which of the first bonus game state (first special state) and the second bonus game state (second special state) will occur can be grasped from the manner of calling attention to addiction. . As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in calling attention to immersion, and to effectively call attention to immersion.

(58) If the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first variable game (game) in the bonus game state (special state), it is displayed before the start of the first game in the bonus game state. The specific image (for example, the image OP1 or the image OP2) that has been displayed continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is stagnant. For example, if a specific image moves while a warning about immersion is being executed, there is a risk that the player's interest will shift to the specific image. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in calling attention to immersion.

(59) The stagnation control is executed before the first variable game (game) is started in an advantageous effect state (specific state) in which a bell navi effect is executed as a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit. , after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. In this way, after the stagnation control is executed to temporarily interrupt the play before the first game in the advantageous effect state is started, the attention of the addiction is executed, whereby the attention of the addiction is raised. can be executed effectively. By the way, when an advantageous effect state is generated, there is a high possibility that the player's interest is directed toward the advantageous effect state and he/she lacks composure. In this way, in a situation where the player is likely to lose his composure, the stagnation control is executed to temporarily interrupt the play, and then the attention to the addiction is executed, thereby alerting the player to the addiction. can be executed more effectively.

(60) A mode of calling attention to immersion executed after execution of the stagnation control is started before the first variable game (game) in the first advantageous effect state is started, and in the second advantageous effect state The mode of calling attention to immersion executed after execution of stagnation control is started prior to the start of the first variable game is made different. As a result, it is possible to grasp which of the first advantageous effect state (first specified effect state) and the second advantageous effect state (second specified effect state) is to be generated from the manner of calling attention to the immersion. becomes. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in calling attention to immersion, and to effectively call attention to immersion.

(61) If the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state), display before the start of the first game in the advantageous effect state The specific image (for example, the image OP3 or the image OP4) that has been displayed continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is stalled. For example, if a specific image moves while a warning about immersion is being executed, there is a risk that the player's interest will shift to the specific image. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in calling attention to immersion.

(62) When the first variation game in the bonus game state (special state) is started within the specific period, the call for attention regarding addiction continues to be executed without ending. Therefore, it is possible to call attention to addiction for at least a specific period after the execution of the attention to addiction is started before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started, and to pay attention to addiction. Arousal can be effectively executed. In addition, if the first variable game in the bonus game state is started after a specific period of time since the call for attention regarding immersion is started before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started, the variable game is started. The alert regarding the immersion continues to be executed until it is started. Therefore, even if the first variable game is not started within the specified period before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started, the game will continue until the first variable game is started after the specified period. It is possible to call attention to immersion, and to effectively call attention to immersion.

(63) By executing a call for attention regarding immersion after execution of stagnation control and temporary stagnation of play, it becomes easier to draw attention to the attention regarding immersion. Also, the specific period is set longer than the execution period during which the stagnant control is executed before the first variable game (game) is started in the bonus game state (special state). As a result, for example, even if a player who has a low interest in calling attention to addiction executes the first variation game in the bonus game state immediately after the stagnation control ends, the player will be alerted to addiction as long as it is within a specific period. continues to run without exiting. Therefore, it is possible to make the user feel uncomfortable that the alert regarding the immersion does not end, and increase interest in the alert regarding the immersion. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to addiction to a player who is not interested in calling attention to addiction.

(64) When the first variable game in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is started within the specific period, the call for attention regarding immersion continues to be executed without ending. Therefore, it is possible to call attention to immersion for at least a specific period after the execution of the attention to immersion is started before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started, and the attention to immersion can be executed. Arousal can be effectively executed. In addition, when the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started after a specific period of time since the execution of the call for attention regarding immersion is started before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started, the variable game is started. The alert regarding the immersion continues to be executed until it is started. Therefore, even if the first variable game is not started within the specified period before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started, the first variable game is started after the specified period. It is possible to call attention to immersion, and to effectively call attention to immersion.

(65) By executing a call for attention regarding immersion after execution of stagnation control and temporary stagnation of play, it becomes easier to draw attention to the attention regarding immersion. Also, the specific period is set longer than the execution period during which the stagnant control is executed before the first variable game (game) is started in the advantageous effect state (specific state). As a result, for example, even if a player who has little interest in calling attention to addiction executes the first variable game in an advantageous effect state immediately after the stagnation control is finished, the player will be alerted to addiction within a specific period of time. continues to run without exiting. For this reason, it is possible to make the user feel uncomfortable that the alert regarding the immersion does not end, and increase interest in the alert regarding the immersion. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to addiction to a player who is not interested in the attention to addiction.

(66) Contents of attention regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect and attention regarding immersion executed before the start of the first variable game (game) in the bonus game state (special state). If the contents are different, there is a possibility that misunderstandings such as calling attention to different events may occur. However, the content of the alert regarding addiction executed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding immersion executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game state. By doing so, it is possible to commonly call attention to the immersion, and to suppress misrecognition of the attention.

(67) Contents of attention regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect and attention regarding immersion executed before the start of the first variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state). If the contents are different, there is a possibility that misunderstandings such as calling attention to different events may occur. However, the content of the alert regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding immersion executed before the start of the first variable game in the advantageous effect state. By doing so, it is possible to commonly call attention to the immersion, and to suppress misrecognition of the attention.

(68) The contents of the alert regarding immersion executed before the start of the first variable game in the advantageous effect state are not during the execution of the standby effect or before the start of the first variable game in the bonus game state. If the contents of the alert regarding the immersion performed previously are different, there is a risk of misrecognition, such as that each alert is calling a different phenomenon. However, the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started, the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect, and the first time in the bonus game The content was the same as the content of the alert regarding addiction executed before the start of the variable game. Thereby, it is possible to commonly call attention to the immersion, and it is possible to suppress misrecognition of the attention.

(69) The mode of calling attention to addiction executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game state. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to addiction and suppress addiction according to each situation during the execution of the standby effect and before the start of the first variable game in the bonus game state. can.

(70) The mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed before the start of the first variable game in the advantageous effect state. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to immersion and suppress immersion according to each situation during execution of the standby effect and before the start of the first variable game in the advantageous effect state. can.

(71) The aspect of calling attention to the addiction executed before the first variation game is started in the bonus game state is the addiction executed before the first variation game is started in the advantageous effect state. It is different from the mode of calling attention to. As a result, attention to immersion is effectively called according to each situation before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game state and before the start of the first variation game in the advantageous effect state. can be executed to suppress immersion.

(Third embodiment)
Next, a game machine according to a third embodiment will be described. In addition, the structure similar to 1st Embodiment attaches|subjects the same code|symbol as 1st Embodiment, and abbreviate|omits about the detailed description and drawing.

In the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding immersion is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state (in the middle of the bonus game state), and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning about immersion is executed. Further, in the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding immersion is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed during the advantageous performance state (in the middle of the advantageous performance state), and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, attention is drawn to the immersion.

In the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed when a predetermined execution condition is established in the middle of the first bonus game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, a predetermined execution condition is established by executing the tenth variation game in the first bonus game state. Therefore, in the third embodiment, after the tenth variation game is executed in the first bonus game state, the first bonus game state is midway, and the tenth variation game is executed in the first bonus game state. Stagnation control is performed later. In addition, the main control CPU 40a performs a counting process for counting the number of variable games executed after being controlled to the first bonus game state or the first bonus effect state. The number of variable games executed in the state or the first bonus effect state can be specified.

Further, in the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed when a predetermined execution condition is established in the middle of the second bonus game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, a predetermined execution condition is established by executing the fifth variation game in the second bonus game state. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the second bonus game state is midway after the fifth variation game is executed in the second bonus game state, and the fifth variation game is executed in the second bonus game state. Stagnation control is performed later. In addition, the main control CPU 40a performs a counting process for counting the number of variable games that have been executed after being controlled to the second bonus game state or the second bonus effect state. The number of variable games executed in the state or the second bonus effect state can be specified.

In the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed when a predetermined execution condition is met during the advantageous effect state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, a predetermined execution condition is established by executing the tenth variation game in the advantageous effect state. Therefore, in the third embodiment, after the 10th variation game is executed in the advantageous effect state, the advantageous effect state is midway, and the stagnation control is executed after the 10th variation game is executed in the advantageous effect state. be. The main control CPU 40a performs a counting process for counting the number of variable games executed after being controlled to the advantageous effect state, and counts the number of variable games executed in the advantageous effect state based on the counting result of the counting process. It is identifiable.

Here, based on FIG. 30, special stagnation processing in the third embodiment will be described.
In the specific stagnation process of the third embodiment, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the first bonus effect state is in progress (step S401). In step S401, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the tenth variation game has ended since the first bonus effect state was established. That is, in step S401, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition that is met during the first bonus game state is met. Determining in step S401 that the tenth variation game has ended after entering the first bonus effect state corresponds to determining that the first bonus game state is in progress. Further, when the first bonus effect state is in the middle (step S401: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the first stagnation start command (step S402). In the process of outputting the first stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs interval time measurement processing (step S403). In step S403, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined interval time and waits until the interval time elapses. Then, when the interval time has passed and the interval time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the first stagnation end command (step S404), and ends the special stagnation process. In the process of outputting the first stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation end command in the output buffer.

If it is not in the middle of the first bonus effect state (step S401: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether it is in the middle of the second bonus effect state (step S405). In step S405, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the fifth variation game has ended since the second bonus effect state was established. That is, in step S405, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition that is met during the second bonus game state is met. Determining in step S405 that the fifth variation game has ended after entering the second bonus effect state corresponds to determining that the second bonus game state is in progress. Further, when the second bonus effect state is in the middle (step S405: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the second stagnation start command (step S406). In the process of outputting the second stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs interval time measurement processing (step S407). In step S407, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined interval time and waits until the interval time elapses. Then, when the interval time has passed and the interval time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of a second stagnation end command (step S408), and ends the special stagnation process. In the process of outputting the second stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation end command in the output buffer.

If it is not in the middle of the second bonus effect state (step S405: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether it is in the middle of the advantageous effect state (step S409). In step S409, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the 10th variation game has ended after the advantageous effect state is established. That is, in step S409, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition that is met during the advantageous effect state is met. Determining in step S409 that the tenth variation game has ended after the advantageous effect state is established corresponds to determining that the advantageous effect state is in progress. If it is not in the middle of the advantageous effect state (step S409: NO), the main control CPU 40a ends the special stagnation process. On the other hand, when the advantageous effect state is in progress (step S409: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the third stagnation start command (step S410). In the process of outputting the third stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation start command in the output buffer. The third stagnation start command includes a special third stagnation start command and a non-special third stagnation start command. Then, if it is the second advantageous effect state among the advantageous effect states, the main control CPU 40a stores the special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410. On the other hand, if it is the first advantageous effect state among the advantageous effect states, the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs interval time measurement processing (step S411). In step S411, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined interval time and waits until the interval time elapses. Then, when the interval time has passed and the interval time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the third stagnation end command (step S412), and ends the special stagnation process. In the process of outputting the third stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation end command in the output buffer.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S402 to S404, the processing of steps S406 to S408, and the processing of steps S410 to S412 correspond to stagnation control. In the following description, the execution of steps S402 to S404, the execution of steps S406 to S408, and the execution of steps S410 to S412 are referred to as "stagnation control is executed." There is a case that it will be done. In this embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs any one of the processing of steps S402 to S404, the processing of steps S406 to S408, and the processing of steps S410 to S412, thereby executing stagnation control. A function as a control means is realized. Further, in the present embodiment, among the processing of steps S402 to S404, the processing of steps S406 to S408, and the processing of steps S410 to S412, in the processing of steps S403, S407, and S411, a predetermined interval time Measurement control, that is, measurement control of a predetermined interval time is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of steps S402 to S404 and the processing of steps S406 to S408 are performed when the bonus game state corresponding to the special state is performed. known to be executed. Similarly, in the present embodiment, since the processes of steps S410 to S412 are performed when the advantageous effect state corresponding to the specific state is established, it can be understood that the stagnation control is executed when the specific state is established.

In the slot machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect. In the slot machine 10, an appearance effect may be executed in the effect display device 14 during execution of the interval effect.

Next, various interval effects will be described.
After the processing of steps S402 to S404 of the special stagnation process is performed by the main control CPU 40a and the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect during the first bonus effect state. be. In addition, after the processing of steps S404 to S406 of the special stagnation process is performed by the main control CPU 40a and the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect during the second bonus effect state. be. Further, the main control CPU 40a performs the processing of steps S410 to S412 of the special stagnation process, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect during the advantageous effect state.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the first bonus game state (in the middle of the first bonus game state), the effect display device 14 displays a warning image TGa to call attention to immersion. be. That is, the alert regarding immersion executed in the first bonus game state is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play." ] is displayed. In addition, the warning regarding addiction that is executed in the first bonus game state is "Beware of addiction." ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image TGa corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Further, the alert image TGa is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGa is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as the reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGa is displayed in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel viewing area, to alert the player to the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGa is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGa in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding the immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area where the alert image TGa is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, the interval effect executed in the first bonus game state is referred to as the first interval effect. In the first interval effect, the effect display device 14 displays the image IN1. Image IN1 is "Get a lot of medals! ] is an image containing characters (character information). Note that the image IN1 displayed when the first interval effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, image IN1) displayed in the bonus game state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image operation is stagnant. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed in the special state, the specific image that was displayed in the special state continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image becomes stagnant. be done.

When the first interval performance is executed, if the appearance performance is executed with the performance contents in which the third character appears, the performance display device 14 displays an image CH3 simulating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the rear side of the attention calling image TGa. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), in the second bonus game state (in the middle of the second bonus game state), the effect display device 14 displays a warning image TGc to call attention to immersion. be. That is, the alert regarding immersion executed in the second bonus game state is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play." ] is displayed. In addition, the warning regarding addiction that is executed in the second bonus game state is "Beware of addiction." ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the caution image TGc corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image TGc is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGc is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGc is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGc is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the display area where the alert image TGc is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGc in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGc is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, the interval effect executed in the second bonus game state is referred to as the second interval effect. In the second interval effect, the effect display device 14 displays the image IN2. Image IN2 is "Still, from now on! ] is an image containing characters (character information). Note that the image IN2 displayed when the second interval effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, image IN2) displayed in the bonus game state continues to be displayed without operation, and the specific image operation is stagnated. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed in the special state, the specific image that was displayed in the special state continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image becomes stagnant. be done.

When the second interval performance is executed, if the appearance performance is executed with the performance contents in which the first character appears, the performance display device 14 displays an image CH1 simulating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed on the back side of the attention calling image TGc. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

As shown in FIG. 31(c), in the first advantageous effect state (in the middle of the first advantageous effect state), the effect display device 14 displays an attention calling image TGe to call attention to immersion. be. That is, the alert regarding immersion executed in the first advantageous effect state is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play." ] is displayed. In addition, the warning regarding the addiction that is executed in the first advantageous effect state is "Beware of the addiction." ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the caution image TGe corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Also, the alert image TGe is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention calling image TGe is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. display area. In this way, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGe is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGe is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying the attention-calling image TGe in the predetermined effect area, the attention regarding the immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the attention-calling image TGe is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, the interval effect executed in the first advantageous effect state is referred to as the third interval effect. In the third interval effect, the effect display device 14 displays the image IN3. Image IN3 says, "Now is the game! ] is an image containing characters (character information). The image IN3 displayed when the third interval effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed in the advantageous effect state, the specific image (for example, image IN3) that was displayed in the advantageous effect state continues to be displayed without operation, and the specific image operation is stagnant. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the specific state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the specific state is started It continues to be displayed without motion, and the motion of that particular image is stalled.

When the third interval performance is executed, if the appearance performance is executed with the performance contents in which the second character appears, the performance display device 14 displays an image CH2 simulating the second character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH2 is displayed on the back side of the attention calling image TGe. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

As shown in FIG. 31(d), in the first advantageous effect state (in the middle of the first advantageous effect state), the effect display device 14 displays an attention calling image TGf to call attention to immersion. be. That is, the alert regarding immersion executed in the second advantageous effect state is "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play." ] is displayed. In addition, the warning regarding the immersion that is executed in the second advantageous effect state is "Beware of immersion." ] is displayed. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the caution image TGf corresponding to the predetermined caution image is longer than the width of one reel.

Also, the attention calling image TGf is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention calling image TGf is displayed is different from the transmission area 14a as a reel visual area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmission type display. This is the display area. In this manner, in the slot machine 10, the attention image TGf is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, to alert the user of the immersion. In addition, the display area where the alert image TGf is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed corresponds to the predetermined rendering area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alert image TGf is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area where the attention-calling image TGf is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is a region that does not overlap with

In the following description, the interval effect executed in the second advantageous effect state is referred to as the fourth interval effect. In the fourth interval effect, the heart movable body 25 operates. Since the attention-calling image TGf is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25, even if the heart-shaped movable body 25 moves in a front view, the heart-shaped movable body 25 is displayed as the attention-calling image TGf. does not cover

In the fourth interval effect, the effect display device 14 displays the image IN4. Image IN4 is the time of the game! ] is an image containing characters (character information). Note that the image IN4 displayed when the fourth interval effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed in the advantageous effect state, the specific image (for example, image IN4) that was displayed in the advantageous effect state continues to be displayed without operation, and the specific image operation is stagnated. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed in the specific state, the specific image that was displayed in the specific state continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image becomes stagnant. be done.

When the fourth interval performance is executed, if the appearance performance is executed with the performance contents in which the third character appears, the performance display device 14 displays an image CH3 simulating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the attention calling image TGf. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when attention is being called for the immersion.

Hereinafter, control related to various interval performances will be described.
First, the control related to the first interval production will be described.
When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGa is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S402 of the special stagnation process, the first stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. After starting the execution of the stagnation control, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. Also, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN1 is displayed.

Further, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the performance contents of the appearance performance, and controls the performance display device 14 so that the appearance performance of the determined performance contents is executed. In the third embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19(a), as in the first embodiment. Note that the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect when the second interval effect to the fourth interval effect described below are executed in the same manner as when the first interval effect is executed. do. Further, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. As in the first embodiment, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed at least in the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14. FIG.

Also, when executing the first interval effect, that is, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGa and then starts measuring the specific time. Then, when the variable game start command is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGa at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. In this embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the interval time measured in step S403 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first interval effect ends. to control. As a result, the effect display device 14 stops displaying the image IN1 and the image related to the appearance effect (for example, the image CH3), but continues to display the alert image TGa. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started within a specific period of time (within a specific period) after the start of execution of the call for attention regarding immersion in the special state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the variable game start command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the alert image TGa ends when the variable game start command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game starts after a specific period of time since the execution of the attention calling for addiction is started in the special state, the execution of the attention calling for addiction ends. By the way, even if the number of bets is set before or after the specific period of time has elapsed since the measurement of the specific period of time has started, the first interval effect continues to be executed without ending. The alert regarding immersion continues to be executed.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the first interval effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first interval effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGa as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a will display the alert image when ending the first interval effect. The display of TGa is also terminated. As in the first embodiment, when a settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of a warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed. Furthermore, when the waiting time elapses without the number of bets being set after that, the waiting effect is executed in the effect display device 14 if the replay is not provided, and the player becomes absorbed in the execution of the standby effect. A warning about is executed.

Next, control related to the second interval effect will be described.
When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGc is displayed. In this embodiment, after the second stagnation start command is stored in the output buffer by the main control CPU 40a in step S406 of the special stagnation process, the second stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. After starting the execution of the stagnation control, a warning regarding the immersion is executed. Further, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN2 is displayed. Further, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the performance contents of the appearance performance, and controls the performance display device 14 so that the appearance performance of the determined performance contents is executed. Further, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

Also, when executing the second interval effect, that is, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGc and then starts measuring the specific time. Then, when the variable game start command is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGc at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. In this embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the interval time measured in step S407 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second interval effect ends. to control. As a result, the effect display device 14 ends the display of the image IN2 and the image related to the appearance effect, but continues to display the alert image TGc. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started within a specific period of time (within a specific period) after the start of execution of the call for attention regarding immersion in the special state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the variable game start command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the alert image TGc ends when the variable game start command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game starts after a specific period of time since the execution of the attention calling for addiction is started in the special state, the execution of the attention calling for addiction ends. Incidentally, even if the number of bets is set before or after the specific period of time has elapsed since the measurement of the specific period of time has started, the second interval effect continues to be executed without ending. The alert regarding immersion continues to be executed.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the second interval effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second interval effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGc as well. Even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image when ending the second interval effect. The display of TGc is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed. Furthermore, when the waiting time elapses without the number of bets being set after that, the waiting effect is executed in the effect display device 14 if the replay is not provided, and the player becomes absorbed in the execution of the standby effect. A warning about is executed.

Next, control related to the third interval effect will be described.
When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGe is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410 of the special stagnation process, the non-special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed.

When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN3 is displayed. Also, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. do. Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

Also, when executing the third interval effect, that is, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGe and then starts measuring the specific time. Then, when the variable game start command is input before the specified time elapses after the start of measurement of the specified time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGe at least until the specified time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. In this embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the interval time measured in step S411 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third interval effect ends. to control. As a result, the effect display device 14 stops displaying the image IN3 and the image related to the appearance effect, but continues to display the attention-calling image TGe. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started within a specific period of time (within a specific period) after the start of execution of a call for attention regarding immersion in the specific state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the variable game start command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the alert image TGe ends when the variable game start command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game starts after a specific period of time since the execution of the attention call regarding addiction is started in the specific state, the execution of the attention call regarding addiction ends.

Also, when the settlement command is input during execution of the third interval effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third interval effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGe as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image when ending the third interval effect. The display of TGe is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed. Further, when the waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets after that, the waiting effect is executed in the effect display device 14 if the replay is not given, and the player becomes absorbed in the execution of the standby effect. A warning about is executed.

Next, control relating to the fourth interval effect will be described.
When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGf is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410 of the special stagnation process, the special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. , after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the immersion is executed.

When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN4 is displayed. In addition, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. In addition, when a special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 and causes the heart movable body 25 to operate.

Also, when executing the fourth interval effect, that is, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGf and then starts measuring the specific time. Then, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alert image TGf at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled as follows. In this embodiment, the period from when the measurement of the specific time is started until the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. In this embodiment, the execution period during which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S411 is executed is shorter than the specific time, that is, the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth interval effect ends. to control. As a result, the effect display device 14 stops displaying the image IN4 and the image related to the appearance effect, but continues to display the alert image TGf. At this time, the heart movable body 25 moves to the origin 25a and returns to the origin 25a. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started within a specific period of time (within a specific period of time) after the start of execution of the call for attention regarding immersion in the specific state, A warning about immersion continues to be executed. Further, when the variable game start command is input after the specific time has passed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device so that the display of the alert image TGf ends when the variable game start command is input. 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game starts after a specific period of time from the start of the execution of the call for attention regarding the addiction in the specific state, the execution of the call for attention regarding the addiction ends.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the fourth interval effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth interval effect ends. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alert image TGf as well. It should be noted that even if the settlement command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a will display the alert image when ending the fourth interval effect. The display of TGf is also terminated. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while attention is being drawn to the immersion, the performance display device 14 terminates the execution of the attention to the immersion and executes the attention to the return of the storage medium. It will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, if the payment operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion, the effect execution means ends the execution of the attention for addiction and calls for the return of the storage medium. executed. Furthermore, when the waiting time elapses without the number of bets being set after that, the waiting effect is executed in the effect display device 14 if the replay is not provided, and the player becomes absorbed in the execution of the standby effect. A warning about is executed.

Here, a description will be given of calling attention to the immersion executed in the slot machine 10 of the third embodiment.
The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to call attention (shown in FIG. 15(d)) regarding immersion by displaying the attention image GT3. In addition, the slot machine 10 provides an alert (shown in FIG. 31(a)) relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGa, and an alert image TGc relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGc. Attention alert (shown in FIG. 31(b)) is configured to be executable. In addition, the slot machine 10 provides an alert (shown in FIG. 31(c)) relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGe, and an alert image TGf relating to immersion executed by displaying an alert image TGf. Attention (shown in FIG. 31(d)) is configured to be executable. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding the immersion executed by displaying the attention image GT3 corresponds to the attention regarding the immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding addiction executed by displaying the attention image TGa corresponds to the attention regarding immersion executed during the first bonus game state. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding addiction executed by displaying the attention image TGc corresponds to the attention regarding immersion executed during the second bonus game state. Further, in the present embodiment, the attention regarding the immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGe and the attention regarding the immersion executed by displaying the attention calling image TGf are performed in the advantageous effect state. It corresponds to a warning about immersion executed at a certain time.

All of the alert images GT3, TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable play. ] (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information). In other words, the contents of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect, the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state, and the advantageous effect state are: Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] is displayed. In addition, the contents of the alert regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect, the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state, and the advantageous effect state are: Be careful not to immerse yourself in it. ] is displayed.

In this way, the contents of the alert regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect are the same as the contents of the attention regarding immersion executed during the bonus game. In other words, the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during the bonus game is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. Note that, in the present embodiment, when a single bonus game is generated among the bonus games, a warning regarding addiction is not executed. In this embodiment, it can be said that the content of the alert regarding addiction executed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding immersion executed during the specific bonus game.

In addition, the content of the attention regarding the immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the advantageous effect state. In other words, the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed in the advantageous effect state is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. In addition, the content of the alert regarding immersion executed in the bonus game state is the same as the content of the alert regarding immersion executed in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed in the advantageous effect state is the same as the content of the call for attention regarding immersion executed in the bonus game state.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, during execution of the standby effect, in the first bonus game state, in the second bonus game state, and in the advantageous effect state, the immersion is executed. The contents of the alerts regarding are common and the same. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(d) and FIGS. 31(a) to 31(d), the position where the attention-calling image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 corresponds to the attention-calling image GT3 on the effect display device 14. It differs from the position where TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed. Also, the size of the attention-calling image GT3 displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention-calling images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area in which the attention-calling image GT3 is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention-calling images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed in the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters (character information) included in the alert image GT3 is different from the typeface of the characters (character information) included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the color of characters (so-called character color) included in the alert image GT3 is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the size of characters included in the alert image GT3 is different from the size of characters included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf.

Note that, as in the first embodiment, the image displayed when attention is drawn regarding immersion is executed with respect to the displayed position, size, displayed display area, typeface of characters included in the image, and characters included in the image. If at least one of the color of the characters included in the image and the size of the characters included in the image is different, it can be said that the mode of calling attention to the immersion is different.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the bonus game state. In other words, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the bonus game state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the advantageous effect state. In other words, the mode of calling attention regarding immersion executed during the advantageous effect state is different from the mode of calling attention regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) to 31(d), the positions where the attention-calling images TGa and TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 are the positions where the attention-calling images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. different from Also, the sizes of the attention-calling images TGa and TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 are different from the sizes of the attention-calling images TGe and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling images TGa and TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution images TGa and TGc is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution images TGe and TGf. In addition, the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the advantageous effect state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the bonus game state. In other words, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the bonus game state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the advantageous effect state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to preoccupation executed in the specific state is different from the mode of calling attention to preoccupation executed in the special state.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), the position where the attention calling image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the attention calling image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14. FIG. Also, the size of the attention calling image TGa displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention calling image TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGa is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGc. Also, the color of the characters included in the caution image TGa is different from the color of the characters included in the caution image TGc. In addition, the size of characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGc.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to addiction executed in the first bonus game state is different from the aspect of calling attention to addiction executed in the second bonus game state. . In other words, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed in the second bonus game state is different from the mode of calling attention to addiction executed in the first bonus game state. In this embodiment, the first bonus stop number corresponds to the first special display result, and the first bonus game state corresponds to the first special state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second bonus stop number corresponds to the second special display result, and the second bonus game state corresponds to the second special state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion that is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started in the first special state is the same as when the execution of the stagnation control is started in the second special state. It is different from the mode of calling attention regarding immersion executed after the immersion.

As shown in FIGS. 31( c ) and 31 ( d ), the position where the attention calling image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the attention calling image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the size of the attention calling image TGe displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention calling image TGf displayed on the effect display device 14 . That is, the display area where the attention-calling image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the attention-calling image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14 . Also, the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGe is different from the typeface of the characters included in the caution image TGf. Also, the color of the characters included in the caution image TGe is different from the color of the characters included in the caution image TGf. In addition, the size of characters included in the alert image TGe is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the first advantageous effect state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the second advantageous effect state. . In other words, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the second advantageous effect state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the first advantageous effect state. That is, in this embodiment, the first advantageous effect state corresponds to the first specified effect state, and the second advantageous effect state corresponds to the second specified effect state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the aspect of calling attention to immersion that is executed after execution of the stagnation control is started when the stagnation control is started when the stagnation control is executed when the stagnation control is executed when the stagnation control is started when the second effect specific state is. It is different from the form of calling attention to immersion that is executed after starting.

Next, based on FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the first bonus game state and the first advantageous effect state will be described.
As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the tenth variation game in the first bonus game state ends, execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t51. In the stagnation control started at timing t51, a predetermined interval time measurement process is performed, and the stagnation control is continued at least for the interval time. Further, when execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t51, the first interval effect is executed. At this time, an alert image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and an alert regarding the immersion is executed. Also, assume that the start lever 20 is operated by operating the bet button 18 at timing t52 before the interval time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t52, since the stagnation control is being executed, if the payout combination wins in the tenth variation game in the first bonus game state, the variation game cannot be executed if the number of bets cannot be set. I can't even get it to start.

Further, when the start lever 20 is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set at a timing t53 which is after the interval time has passed from the timing t51 and before the specific time has passed from the timing t51, the first The eleventh variation game is started in the bonus game state, and execution of the first interval effect is completed. However, from timing t51 to timing t54 when a specific period of time elapses, the effect display device 14 continues to display the attention calling image TGa, and continues to execute attention calling regarding immersion. On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated with the number of bets set at timing t55 after the interval time has passed from timing t51 and after the specific time has passed from timing t51, The 11th variation game is started in the 1-bonus game state, and the execution of the first interval effect is completed. At this time, the display of the alert image TGa is also terminated along with the termination of the execution of the first interval effect, and the attention regarding the immersion is terminated.

Incidentally, when the waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets even after a specific time elapses from the timing t51, the execution of the waiting effect is started. Then, during execution of the standby effect, the attention calling image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 to call attention to the immersion. In this case, since the first interval performance continues to be executed until the waiting time elapses, the attention calling image TGa continues to be displayed on the performance display device 14, and the attention to the immersion continues to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), when the tenth variation game in the first advantageous effect state ends, execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t61. In the stagnation control started at timing t61, a predetermined interval time measurement process is performed, and the stagnation control is continued at least for the interval time. Further, when execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t61, the third interval effect is executed. At this time, an alert image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and an alert regarding the immersion is executed. It is also assumed that the start lever 20 is operated by operating the bet button 18 at timing t62 before the interval time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t62, since the stagnation control is being executed, if the payout combination wins in the tenth variable game in the first advantageous effect state, the variable game will not be executed unless the number of bets can be set. I can't even get it to start.

Further, when the start lever 20 is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set at timing t63 after the interval time has passed from timing t61 and before the specific time has passed from timing t61, the first The eleventh variation game is started in the advantageous effect state, and the execution of the third interval effect ends. However, from timing t61 to timing t64 when a specific time elapses, the effect display device 14 continues to display the caution image TGe, and continues to execute the attention regarding the immersion. On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated with the number of bets set at timing t65 after the interval time has elapsed from timing t61 and after the specific time has elapsed from timing t61, the first The eleventh variation game is started in the one-advantage effect state, and the execution of the third interval effect ends. At this time, the display of the attention-calling image TGe ends with the completion of the execution of the third interval effect, and the attention-calling regarding the immersion ends.

Incidentally, when the standby time elapses without the bet number being set even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t61, the execution of the standby effect is started. Then, during execution of the standby effect, the attention calling image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 to call attention to the immersion. In this case, since the third interval performance continues to be executed until the waiting time elapses, the attention calling image TGe continues to be displayed on the performance display device 14, and the attention to the immersion continues to be executed.

According to the third embodiment, in addition to the effects (5), (14), (15), (23), (25) to (39) and (49) to (53) of the first embodiment, the following have a similar effect.
(72) The stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state (special state), and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding immersion is executed. In this way, after the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state to temporarily interrupt the play, the attention regarding the addiction is executed, whereby the attention regarding the immersion can be effectively executed. . In particular, when the player is in the bonus game state, the player's attention is directed toward the bonus game state, and there is a high possibility that the player lacks composure. In this way, in situations where there is a high possibility of a lack of composure, stagnation control is executed to temporarily suspend play, and then a warning regarding immersion is executed, making it more effective to call attention to immersion. can be executed.

(73) In the first bonus game state (first special state), after the stagnant control starts to be executed, there is a form of calling attention to addiction, and in the second bonus game state (second special state), It is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion that is executed after execution of stagnation control is started at a certain time. As a result, it is possible to grasp which of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state is occurring from the mode of calling attention to immersion. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in calling attention to immersion, and to effectively call attention to immersion.

(74) When the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state (special state), the specific image (for example, image IN1 or image IN2) displayed in the bonus game state is displayed without operating. and the motion of that particular image is stalled. For example, if a specific image moves while a warning about immersion is being executed, there is a risk that the player's interest will shift to the specific image. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in calling attention to immersion.

(75) Stagnation control is executed in an advantageous effect state (specific state) in which a bell navi effect is executed as a guidance effect for guiding an operation that can obtain a profit, and the stagnation control is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started. A warning about is executed. In this way, after executing the stagnation control and temporarily interrupting the play in the advantageous effect state, by executing the attention regarding the immersion, it is possible to effectively execute the attention regarding the immersion. . In particular, when it is in the advantageous effect state, the player's interest is directed toward the advantageous effect state, and there is a high possibility that the player lacks composure. In this way, in situations where there is a high possibility of a lack of composure, stagnation control is executed to temporarily suspend play, and then a warning regarding immersion is executed, making it more effective to call attention to immersion. can be executed.

(76) A mode of calling attention to immersion, which is executed after execution of the stagnation control is started when the first advantageous effect state (first specified effect state), and a second advantageous effect state (second specified effect state) ), the manner of calling attention to the immersion that is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started is different. As a result, it is possible to grasp which of the first advantageous effect state and the second advantageous effect state is to be generated from the form of calling attention to the immersion. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in calling attention to immersion, and to effectively call attention to immersion.

(77) When the stagnation control is executed in the advantageous effect state (specific state), the specific image (for example, image IN3 or image IN4) that was displayed in the advantageous effect state is displayed without operating. and the motion of that particular image is stalled. For example, if a specific image moves while a warning about immersion is being executed, there is a risk that the player's interest will shift to the specific image. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in calling attention to immersion.

(78) If the next variable game is started within the specific period, the call for attention regarding the addiction continues to be executed without ending. Therefore, it is possible to call attention to addiction for at least a specific period after starting to call attention to addiction, and to effectively call attention to addiction. In addition, when the next variable game is started after a specific period of time from the start of the call for attention regarding addiction, the call for attention regarding addiction continues to be executed until the variation game is started. Therefore, even if the next variable game does not start within the specified period, it is possible to call attention to addiction until the next variable game starts after the specified period. can be executed effectively.

(79) By executing a call for attention regarding immersion after execution of stagnation control and temporary stagnation of the play, it becomes easier to draw attention to the attention regarding immersion. Also, the specific period is set longer than the execution period during which the stagnant control is executed in the bonus game state (special state). As a result, for example, even if a player who is less interested in the attention of addiction causes the next variable game to be executed immediately after the end of the stagnation control, the attention about addiction will not end within a specific period. continues to run. Therefore, it is possible to make the user feel uncomfortable that the alert regarding the immersion does not end, and increase interest in the alert regarding the immersion. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to addiction to a player who is not interested in calling attention to addiction.

(80) By executing a call for attention regarding immersion after execution of stagnation control and temporary stagnation of the play, it becomes easier to draw attention to the attention regarding immersion. Moreover, the specific period is set longer than the execution period during which the stagnation control is executed when the advantageous effect state (specific state) is established. As a result, for example, even if a player who is less interested in the attention of addiction causes the next variable game to be executed immediately after the end of the stagnation control, the attention about addiction will not end within a specific period. continues to run. For this reason, it is possible to make the user feel uncomfortable that the alert regarding the immersion does not end, and increase interest in the alert regarding the immersion. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to addiction to a player who is not interested in the attention to addiction.

(81) If the contents of the alert regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect and the contents of the attention regarding immersion executed during the bonus game state (special state) are different, each alerts a different phenomenon. There is a risk of misidentification such as that the However, by making the contents of the alert regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the standby performance and the contents of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the bonus game state the same, the attention regarding the immersion can be made common. Arousing can be executed, and misrecognition with respect to the said alerting can be suppressed.

(82) If the contents of the alert regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect and the contents of the attention regarding immersion executed during the advantageous effect state (specific state) are different, each alerts a different phenomenon. There is a risk of misidentification such as that the However, by making the content of the alert regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect the same as the content of the alert regarding the immersion executed during the advantageous performance state, the attention regarding the immersion can be made common. Arousing can be performed, and misrecognition with respect to the said alerting can be suppressed.

(83) If the contents of the attention regarding immersion executed during the advantageous effect state differ from the contents of the attention regarding immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect or during the bonus game state, they are different. There is a risk of misrecognition, such as calling attention to an event. However, the content of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the advantageous effect state is replaced with the content of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the attention regarding the immersion executed during the bonus game. Same as content. Thereby, it is possible to commonly call attention to the immersion, and to suppress misrecognition of the attention.

(84) The mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the bonus game state. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to the addiction and suppress the addiction according to each situation during execution of the standby effect and in the bonus game state.

(85) The mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the advantageous effect state. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to the immersion and suppress the immersion according to each situation during the execution of the standby effect and in the advantageous effect state.

(86) The mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the bonus game state is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the advantageous effect state. As a result, it is possible to effectively call attention to the addiction and suppress the addiction according to each situation in the bonus game state and in the advantageous effect state.

(Fourth embodiment)
Next, a game machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the structure similar to 1st Embodiment attaches|subjects the same code|symbol as 1st Embodiment, and abbreviate|omits about the detailed description and drawing.

In the first to third embodiments, the predetermined rendering area in which attention is drawn regarding the immersion is executed, and the motion area of the heart movable body 25 are arranged so as not to overlap each other. In the fourth embodiment, the predetermined effect area in which attention is drawn regarding the immersion is executed and the action area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body are overlapped.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), in the fourth embodiment, when the heart movable body 25 does not move, in the front view, in a predetermined rendering area that overlaps with the motion area of the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body, A warning about immersion may be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(b), in the fourth embodiment, when the heart movable body 25 moves, the execution of the alert regarding the immersion is restricted. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, when the execution of the call for attention regarding the immersion is restricted, the attention regarding the immersion is executed in a performance area that does not overlap with the motion area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. That is, in the fourth embodiment, when the heart movable body 25 moves, execution of a call for attention regarding immersion in a predetermined effect area that overlaps with the motion area of the heart movable body 25 is stopped in a front view, and the heart movable body 25 is activated. Execution is switched to calling attention regarding immersion in the performance area that does not overlap with the action area. By the way, in FIG. 33(b), the predetermined rendering area when attention is called for immersion in FIG. is shown.

33(a) and 33(b) exemplify the case where the attention-calling image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 to call attention to immersion. This is the same even when ˜TGd and TGf are displayed to call attention to the immersion. That is, when the other attention-calling images TGa to TGd, TGf are displayed to call attention to the immersion, if the heart movable body 25 does not move, the effect region overlaps the motion region of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. It is configured to execute an alert regarding immersion in.

In the following, a determination of whether or not the heart movable body 25 is to be moved when attention is called for immersion, and an effect region for which attention is called for immersion will be described.
In this embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a conducts an operation lottery to determine whether to operate the heart movable body 25 after the final variation game in the first bonus game state or the second bonus game state. In this embodiment, only when the set value is "3" and the internal mode is the third internal mode, it is possible to decide to operate the heart movable body 25 in the operation lottery. there is Therefore, the operation lottery may be performed only when the set value is "3" and the internal mode is the third internal mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a performs an action lottery after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state.

Then, when it is determined not to move the heart movable body 25 in the action lottery, the sub-control CPU 41a determines that a predetermined attention-calling image (one of the attention-calling images TGa to TGf) is displayed in front view. , the effect display device 14 is controlled so as to be displayed in the effect area overlapping the motion area of the heart movable body 25. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when it is determined to operate the heart movable body 25 in the operation lottery, the sub-control CPU 41a determines that a predetermined attention-calling image (one of the attention-calling images TGa to TGf) is displayed in front view. , the performance display device 14 is controlled so as to be displayed in a performance region that does not overlap with the motion region of the heart movable body 25. - 特許庁Further, when it is determined in the action lottery that the heart movable body 25 is to be operated, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 to cause the heart movable body 25 to be operated. As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined attention-calling image (one of the attention-calling images TGa to TGf) is displayed in an effect area that does not overlap the action area of the heart movable body 25 when viewed from the front. By controlling the effect display device 14 as shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 10 of the fourth embodiment configured as described above, when the heart movable body 25 operates, it can be specified that the set value is "3" and the internal mode is the third internal mode. . That is, if the heart movable body 25 operates, it can be specified that the situation is advantageous. For this reason, the degree of attention to the motion of the heart movable body 25 can be increased.

According to the fourth embodiment, the effects (5), (14), (15), (23), (25) to (39), (49) and (51) to (53) of the first embodiment In addition, it has the following effects.

(87) When the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body does not move, in a front view, there is a case where attention is drawn to the immersion in a predetermined rendering area that overlaps with the motion area of the heart movable body 25 . On the other hand, when the heart movable body 25 moves, the execution of the alert regarding the immersion is restricted. As a result, the execution of calling attention to the immersion is restricted in accordance with whether or not the heart movable body 25 is operated, so that the calling attention to the immersion can be executed more effectively.

(88) When the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body moves, it can be specified that the situation is advantageous, so that the attention to the motion of the heart movable body 25 can be increased. By increasing the degree of attention to the motion of the heart movable body 25, the degree of attention to the motion area of the heart movable body 25 can also be increased. If the user is alerted to the addiction in the , it is possible to draw attention to the attention to the addiction. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively call attention to the immersion.

That is, it is possible to more effectively call attention to immersion while avoiding a situation in which attention to immersion cannot be shown due to movement of the heart movable body 25 .

The above-described embodiment may be changed to another embodiment as follows, for example.
- In the above-described first embodiment, the stagnation control is configured to be executed after one variation game (the final game) in the single bonus game state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, attention is called regarding immersion. may be configured to run. Further, in the second embodiment, the stagnation control is executed before one variation game (first game) is started in the single bonus game state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the immersion control is performed. It may be configured such that an alert is executed. Further, in the above-described third embodiment, the stagnation control is configured to be executed in the single bonus game state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding immersion is executed. may Also, the type of bonus game state generated in the above embodiment may be changed, for example, the single bonus game state may not be generated. That is, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which the single bonus game state is not generated.

The ending times measured in predetermined steps S203, S207, and S211 in the special stagnation process of the first embodiment may be the same or may be different. The ending time measured by other processes may be different from the ending time measured by other processes. Further, the opening times measured in predetermined steps S303, S307 and S311 in the special stagnation process of the second embodiment may be the same or may be different. The opening time to be measured may be different from the opening time measured by other processing. Also, the interval times measured in predetermined steps S403, S407 and S411 in the special stagnation process of the third embodiment may be the same or may be different. The interval time to be measured may be different from the interval time measured by other processing.

- The process of step S203, step S207, and step S211 in the special stagnation process of 1st Embodiment can also be regarded as stagnation control. Similarly, the processing of steps S303, S307, and S311 in the special stagnation processing of the second embodiment can be regarded as stagnation control. Similarly, the processing of steps S403, S407, and S411 in the special stagnation processing of the third embodiment can be regarded as stagnation control. As described above, when the processing after the first stagnation start command to the third stagnation start command are output is regarded as stagnation control, the timing at which the stagnation control is executed, the timing at which a warning about immersion is executed, may be the same, and it may be configured such that execution of the stagnation control is started and attention regarding immersion is executed. Further, the timing at which the alert regarding immersion is executed may be before the timing at which the execution of the stagnation control is started, and the stagnation control is executed after the alert regarding immersion is executed. good too.

- You may vary specific time according to the kind of alerting image. For example, the specific time measured when displaying the alert image TGa and the specific time measured when displaying the alert image TGc may be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the specific time according to the situation, and to effectively call attention to the immersion according to the situation. That is, a specific time in the bonus game state (for example, a specific time measured after the alert image TGa is displayed) and a specific time in the advantageous effect state (for example, a specific time measured after the alert image TGc is displayed) time) and may or may not be the same. If all the specific times are set to the same time, the process of selecting the specific time according to the situation can be omitted, so the process performed by the sub-control CPU 41a can be simplified. Also, the specific time (the length of the specific period) may be the same as the length of the execution period during which the stagnation control is executed, or may be longer than the execution period during which the stagnation control is executed.

- If the number of bets (the number of bets) is set within a specific period, the execution of the alert regarding the obsession may be terminated. In this case, it is not necessary to measure the specific time. Also, when a bet (number of bets) is set within a specific period, the mode of calling attention to obsession may differ before and after the number of bets is set. For example, after the number of bets is set, an alert is displayed in a display area different from the area where the navigation effect is executed (for example, the display area where the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 and the bell navigation images Nb1 to Nb3 are displayed). The image TGa may be configured to be displayed. Similarly, when the start lever 20 is operated within a specific period after the winning of the replay combination, the mode of calling attention to the immersion before and after the operation of the start lever 20 may be changed. For example, after the start lever 20 is operated, a warning is displayed in a display area different from the area in which the navigation effect is executed (for example, the display area in which the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 and the bell navigation images Nb1 to Nb3 are displayed). It may be configured such that a wake-up image TGa is displayed. In the case of the configuration as described above, when the variable game is started and the navigation effect is executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the attention call regarding the immersion from interfering with the navigation effect. Further, by changing (switching) the mode of calling attention to the addiction, it becomes easier to attract the player's line of sight to the attention to the addiction, and the attention to the addiction can be effectively executed.

・Specific images (for example, image 60 and image 61, specific acquisition number image GBc, image OP1, image IN1, etc.) may be operated and displayed on the effect display device 14 when stagnation control is being executed. . For example, in the first ending effect, the image 60 may be configured to move and be displayed on the effect display device 14 .

- In the case of transition from the first advantageous effect state to the second advantageous effect state, it may be constructed such that attention regarding the immersion is executed. Similarly, when shifting from the second advantageous effect state to the first advantageous effect state, it may be constructed such that attention regarding the immersion is executed. Further, when the transition from the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state to the special advantageous effect state is performed, it may be constructed such that attention regarding the immersion is executed.

- You may change the kind of production|presentation state, and you may change the transition mode of an production|presentation state. For example, in the second advantageous effect state, when a variable game is executed, the number of advantageous stays may not be decremented, but the upper limit of advantageous advantage may be decremented. Thus, in the second advantageous effect state, the number of advantageous stays may not be subtracted when the variable game is executed. In addition, it may be constructed such that when the single bonus game state is generated, the state is shifted to a predetermined effect state. In addition, for example, when the winning of a single bonus combination is permitted, the game may be configured to shift to a predetermined effect state when the single bonus combination is not won.

- You may change the kind of game state, and you may change the transition mode of a game state. For example, the game state to be shifted may be changed depending on whether the winning of the first bonus combination is carried over or the winning of the second bonus combination is carried over.

- Although it was configured such that after the stagnation control was executed, the alert regarding the immersion was executed, but the stagnation control does not have to be executed. For example, even if the stagnation control is not executed, it may be configured so that attention regarding immersion continues to be executed at least within a specific period.

- The first termination condition and the second termination condition may be changed. For example, if the number of remaining advantageous stays reaches 0 and the upper limit of advantageous stay is a value greater than 0, then the termination condition is set as the first ending condition, and when the remaining number of advantageous stays reaches 0 A termination condition that is satisfied when the advantageous upper limit value is 0 may be set as the second termination condition.

- In the above embodiment, there may be a case where the normal effect state is shifted to the first advantageous effect state without going through the preparation effect state. For example, when the advantageous shift allowance information is stored in the main control RAM 40c and the promoted replaying combination wins, the value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state is set in the effect state flag. may be configured.

・You may change the content of the warning about immersion. For example, the content of the warning about addiction is, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ” (character information) and “Let’s be careful not to immerse yourself in it. ] (character information) may be displayed. For example, the alert image TGa is a message that says, "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed moderately. ] (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information) and an image containing either one of them. In addition, the content of the alert regarding addiction is configured to include alert regarding addiction to a plurality of gaming machines among pachinko gaming machines, reel-type gaming machines, arrange-ball gaming machines, and rock-ball gaming machines. good too. For example, the alert image TGa is "Pachinko, pachislot, arrange ball, and rock-paper-scissors machines are moderately enjoyable games." ] (character information) may be included in the image.

・You may change the contents regarding the return of storage media. For example, the warning image GTx may read "Please be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card. ] characters (character information) may not be included. For example, the warning image GTx may read "Please be careful not to forget to remove your prepaid card. It may be an image containing characters (character information) such as "Please be careful of theft of prepaid cards. ] (character information) may be included in the image.

・If the mode of alerting is different, the position where the alerting image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the size of the alerting image, the display area where the alerting image is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the alerting image It is not necessary for all of the typefaces, character colors, and sizes of the included characters (character information) to be different. For example, the position where the alert image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the size of the alert image, the display area where the alert image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the typeface and color of characters included in the alert image. , and at least one of the sizes may be different from each other in terms of alerting modes. Therefore, for example, the mode of calling attention to immersion in which the attention-calling image TGa is displayed and the mode of calling attention to immersion in which the attention-calling image TGb is displayed may differ only in the size of each image.

The form of calling attention to addiction executed during execution of the standby effect may be the same as the form of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. Further, the form of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect may be the same as the form of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. Further, even if the mode of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state and the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state are the same. good. That is, a mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect, a mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, and after the final variation game in the advantageous performance state. , may be the same as the aspect of calling attention to the immersion to be executed. In addition, the aspect of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state and the aspect of calling attention to addiction executed after the final variation game in the second bonus game state are the same. may be In addition, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous effect state ends, a mode of calling attention to the immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, and an advantageous effect when the second end condition is satisfied. When the state ends, it may be the same as the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. A form of calling attention to immersion executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state when the termination condition of the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the bonus game state, and an advantageous period by the occurrence of the bonus game. may be the same as the form of calling attention to the addiction executed after the final variation game when the end condition is satisfied.

The mode of calling attention to addiction executed during execution of the standby effect may be the same as the mode of calling attention to addiction executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state. Also, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect may be the same as the mode of calling attention to immersion executed before the first variation game in the advantageous performance state. Also, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state and the mode of calling attention to addiction executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state are the same. may be That is, a form of calling attention to immersion executed during the execution of the standby effect, a form of calling attention to immersion executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state, and the first variation game in the advantageous effect state. , may be the same as the mode of calling attention about immersion executed before. In addition, a mode of calling attention to addiction executed before the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state, and a mode of calling attention to addiction executed before the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state. and may be the same. In addition, there is a mode of calling attention to addiction executed before the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state, and a mode of calling attention to addiction executed before the first variable game in the second advantageous effect state. and may be the same.

The mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect and the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the bonus game state may be the same. Further, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect and the mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the advantageous performance state may be the same. Further, the mode of calling attention to addiction executed in the bonus game state and the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the advantageous effect state may be the same. That is, a mode of calling attention to immersion executed during execution of the standby effect, a mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the bonus game state, and a mode of calling attention to immersion executed during the advantageous performance state. may be the same as the mode of evocation. In addition, the aspect of calling attention to addiction executed in the first bonus game state and the aspect of calling attention to addiction executed in the second bonus game state may be the same. Further, the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the first advantageous performance state and the mode of calling attention to immersion executed in the second advantageous performance state may be the same.

- A speaker 16 may be used to call attention to the immersion. At this time, for example, the words of the voice output from the speaker 16 may be used as the contents of the attention for the immersion, and the owner of the voice (for example, the voice actor) may be used for the attention for the immersion. For example, during the execution of the standby performance, it is said that "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed moderately. ' and 'Beware of getting addicted. and the voice spoken by the man are output from the speaker 16 to call attention to the immersion. On the other hand, after the final variable game in the advantageous effect state, "Pachinko/Pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. ' and 'Beware of getting addicted. and a voice spoken by the woman are output from the speaker 16 to call attention to the immersion. It should be noted that when the speaker 16 is used to call attention to the immersion, the effect display device 14 may be used to call attention to the immersion, or the effect display device 14 may be used to call attention to the immersion. It may be configured not to execute the alert regarding. Note that when using the speaker 16 to call attention to the immersion, the speaker 16 can function as an effect executing means.

Similarly, the speaker 16 may be used to call attention to the return of the storage medium. At this time, for example, the speech of the voice output from the speaker 16 may be used as the content of the attention regarding the return of the storage medium, and the voice (for example, a voice actor) may be used as the form of the attention regarding the return of the storage medium. It should be noted that when the speaker 16 is used to call attention to the return of the storage medium, the effect display device 14 may be used to call attention to the return of the storage medium. The device 14 may be configured so as not to call attention to the return of the storage medium.

- Part or all of the content of the alert regarding immersion in each situation may be changed. For example, the alert image GT3 is "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed moderately. ] (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information) and an image including both. On the other hand, the alert image TGa says, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] (character information) and ``Let's be careful not to get absorbed. ] (character information) and an image including one of them.

- You may combine 1st Embodiment - 3rd Embodiment suitably. For example, it is constructed so that attention regarding immersion is executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus gaming state, and attention regarding immersion is executed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state. may In addition, it is constructed so that attention regarding immersion is executed before the start of the first variation game in the advantageous effect state, and attention regarding immersion is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. may In addition, when the bonus game state is generated, attention to immersion is executed before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game state, while when the advantageous effect state is generated, It may be configured such that a warning regarding immersion is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. When combining the first to third embodiments, the special stagnation process described in each embodiment should be performed.

- During the execution of the standby effect, it is not necessary to call attention to the immersion. Further, in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to call attention to immersion after the final variation game in the bonus game state. Further, in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to call attention to the immersion after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. Further, in the second embodiment, it is not necessary to call attention to immersion before the start of the first variation game in the bonus game state. Further, in the second embodiment, it is not necessary to call attention to immersion before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started. Further, in the third embodiment, it is not necessary to call attention to immersion in the bonus game state. Further, in the third embodiment, it is not necessary to call attention to the immersion in the advantageous effect state. For example, at least one of after the final variation game in the bonus game state and after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state may be configured to call attention to the immersion.

- Depending on the performance state or game state before the bonus game state is generated, whether or not to call attention to immersion may be changed. For example, when a bonus combination is won and a bonus game state is generated in the normal performance state, it is constituted so as to call attention to immersion after the final variation game in the bonus game state. On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won and the bonus game state is generated in the advantageous effect state, it may be constructed so that attention regarding immersion is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. good. Similarly, depending on the effect state or game state before the advantageous effect state is generated, whether or not to call attention to immersion may be changed.

- Depending on the effect state or game state after the end of the bonus game state, whether or not to call attention to immersion may be changed. For example, when the normal effect state is set after the end of the bonus game state, it is configured so that attention regarding immersion is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. On the other hand, when the advantageous effect state is reached after the bonus game state is finished, it may be constructed such that a warning regarding immersion is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state.

- The ending effect may be executed while the advantageous effect state is being controlled. In this case, it is possible to make the player feel as if the advantageous effect state is over, and the interest can be improved by continuing the advantageous effect state after the end of the ending effect. Further, the heart movable body 25 may be configured to operate when the advantageous effect state is continued. Further, in this way, when the advantageous effect state is continuously executed, it may be configured such that the attention regarding the immersion is not executed.

- Even during execution of the variable game, for example, when the upper button SBa or the lower button SBc is operated, the volume of the character voice may be adjusted. At this time, even if the right button SBb or the left button SBd is operated during execution of the variable game, the volume of the background music may be configured to be unadjustable. Similarly, even during execution of the variable game, the volume of the background music may be adjustable when, for example, the right button SBb or the left button SBd is operated. At this time, even if, for example, the up button SBa or the down button SBc is operated during execution of the variable game, the volume of the character voice may be configured to be unadjustable.

During the execution of the standby effect, the volume may be adjusted by operating the menu button MB only within the period after the execution of the call for attention regarding the immersion. Alternatively, the volume may be adjusted by operating any one of the up button SBa, right button SBb, down button SBc, and left button SBd without operating the menu button MB. At this time, the menu may not be displayed, and the volume may be adjusted directly.

- You may change the kind of alerting performed during execution of standby production. For example, one type or two types of alerts may be executed during execution of the standby effect. Further, in the above-described embodiment, it may be configured such that more types of attention than those executed during execution of the standby effect are executed. Further, it is not necessary to call attention during execution of the standby effect, for example, it may be configured so that attention regarding immersion is not executed during execution of the standby effect.

- During execution of the standby effect, after the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB as the predetermined operating means is executed, the attention of the immersion may be called. Also, during the execution of the standby effect, when the attention is being called for the immersion, the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB may be executed. Further, even when the menu button MB is operated during execution of the standby performance, the standby performance may be continuously executed. In addition, it may be constituted so that, when the attention regarding the immersion is being executed during execution of the standby performance, the attention regarding the immersion is continuously executed even when the menu button MB is operated.

- When the number of bets (number of bets) is set, the waiting effect may be executed. For example, even if the number of bets (number of bets) is set, the standby effect is not executed when the replay is given, and the standby effect is executed when the replay is not given. may be configured. Further, when the waiting time has elapsed, the waiting effect may be executed even when the replay is given. That is, although the standby effect is not executed when the settlement button 19 is operated, the standby effect may be executed when the standby time elapses.

- Even if the payment button 19 is operated while the attention is being called for addiction, it may be configured so that the attention for addiction is continuously executed. For example, if the payment button 19 is operated during the standby period, it may be configured such that the attention regarding the immersion continues to be executed. In addition, for example, when the payout button 19 is operated when attention is being called for the immersion executed during the execution of the standby performance, the execution of the attention for the immersion is terminated. On the other hand, it may be constructed so that when attention is being called for immersion after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the execution of attention for immersion is continued even if the settlement button 19 is operated. In this case, it may be constructed such that when the attention is being called for the immersion after the last variable game in the advantageous performance state, the execution of the attention for the immersion is continued even if the settlement button 19 is operated.

When the settlement process (settlement control) is performed triggered by the operation of the settlement button 19 as settlement operation means, the execution of the standby performance is started, and when the standby performance is being executed. It may be configured such that a settlement effect is executed. In this case, it may be configured such that, while the standby effect is being executed, a warning regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. In this case, the time required for the logo effect is preferably longer than the time required from the start of the settlement effect to the end of the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium. With this configuration, it is possible to call attention to the settlement effect and the return of the storage medium before executing various kinds of attention.

- The period during which the settlement effect is executed and the period during which the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is executed may be partially or wholly overlapped. In other words, when the settlement button 19 is operated, the settlement performance may be executed, and at the same time, a warning regarding the return of the storage medium may be executed. In this case, after the execution of the settlement effect is started, it may be configured such that the attention regarding the return of the storage medium is executed while the settlement effect is being executed. In addition, the timing at which the execution of the settlement effect is started may be the same as the timing at which the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium is started. It should be noted that the settlement performance may be executed after the execution of the attention call regarding the return of the storage medium is started. It may be configured such that only one of the settlement effect and the call for attention regarding the return of the storage medium is executed by the effect display device 14 . For example, the effect display device 14 may be configured to call attention to the return of the storage medium, and the speaker 16 may be configured to perform the settlement effect.

- It is not necessary to apply the advantageous effect state to the slot machine in which the advantageous effect state can be generated. Similarly, the bonus game state may not be applied to slot machines that can occur, and for example, only the advantageous effect state out of the advantageous effect state and the bonus game state may be applied to the game machine that can occur.

- The navigation effect may be executed even in the effect state other than the advantageous effect state. For example, it may be configured such that when it is in the preparatory presentation state, the bell navigator presentation is executed. Further, even when the bonus effect state is set, that is, even when the bonus game state is set, the Bell Navi effect may be executed.

- Also in the second embodiment and the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the starry sky effect may be performed when attention is being drawn for immersion. In the second and third embodiments, the starry sky effect is executed before the next internal mode is determined, but the internal mode to be shifted to after the bonus game state or advantageous effect state is completed is guessed. In doing so, the internal mode before the transition may be helpful. Therefore, even when the starry sky effect is executed in the second embodiment or the third embodiment, the starry sky effect suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying the internal control state. It can be said.

- Both the appearance effect and the starry sky effect may not be executed. For example, at least one of the appearance effect and the starry sky effect may be executed. Further, after the execution of the alert regarding the immersion, the appearance effect or the starry sky effect may be executed. In the case of such a configuration, it becomes easy to draw attention to the performance display device 14 in which attention is being drawn for the immersion until the appearance performance or the starry sky performance is executed, and the attention for the immersion is effectively executed. can be done. Also, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect may be configured not to be executed when attention is being called for the immersion. That is, it is not necessary to execute a specific effect for suggesting or notifying the degree of advantage for the occurrence of the advantageous state.

- The appearance effect as the specific effect may be an effect suggesting a set value. For example, in the above-described embodiment, even if the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the third character appears, the set value is only "3", and the set value is "3". It does not have to be specified. Also, the appearance effect may be an effect of notifying a set value. For example, in the above-described embodiment, it may be possible to specify that the set value is "1" when the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the first character appears. That is, the appearance effect may be an effect suggesting the set value, or an effect notifying the set value.

・The values that can be set as setting values do not have to be in the three stages of "1" to "3", and for example, the setting values may be configured to be settable in six stages of "1" to "6". . Also, it does not have to be applied to a slot machine configured to be able to change setting values.

- The starry sky effect as the specific effect may be an effect suggesting an internal mode. For example, in the above embodiment, even if the starry sky effect is executed with the effect content in which planets and stars are displayed, the degree of expectation for the third internal mode is high, and the third internal mode may not be specified. Also, the starry sky effect may be an effect for notifying the internal mode. For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect content in which three stars are displayed, the first internal mode may be specified. That is, the starry sky effect may be an effect suggesting the internal mode, or may be an effect informing the internal mode.

・The type of internal mode may be changed. For example, the number of types of internal modes may be two, or four or more. Also, the internal mode as the internal control state may not be configured to be controllable.

A part or all of the display area (predetermined display area) in which the alert image (for example, the alert image TGa) displayed when the attention about immersion is executed is used as the reel visual recognition area. It may be configured to overlap (overlap) the transmissive region 14a. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a warning image is displayed in the transmissive region 14a, and a warning regarding immersion is executed. In addition, the horizontal width of the warning image displayed when the warning regarding immersion is executed may be the same as the horizontal width of one reel, or may be shorter than the horizontal width of one reel when viewed from the front. good.

・The display area (predetermined display area) where the attention-calling image (for example, the attention-calling image TGa) displayed when the attention-calling regarding the immersion is executed is the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It may be a region that overlaps with the motion region. For example, when the heart movable body 25 does not move, a warning image TGa may be displayed in an area overlapping the movement area of the heart movable body 25 to call attention to the immersion. On the other hand, when the heart movable body 25 moves, a caution image TGa may be displayed in a region overlapping the movement region of the heart movable body 25 to call attention to the immersion. Further, when the heart movable body 25 moves, it may be configured so that the attention regarding the immersion is not executed. Also, the specific movable body may be the star movable body 26 . The star movable body 26 may be configured to move forward of the effect display device 14, or may be configured not to move forward of the effect display device 14 as in the above embodiment.

- In the said 4th Embodiment, you may change the conditions in which the heart movable body 25 operate|moves. For example, if the set value is a set value with a higher degree of advantage than "1", the heart movable body 25 may be configured to operate. Further, for example, the heart movable body 25 may be configured to operate in an internal mode that is more advantageous than the first internal mode. Thus, it is not necessary to configure the operation of the heart movable body 25 to be determined based on both the set value and the internal mode. Also, in the second embodiment, the fourth embodiment may be adopted. Similarly, the fourth embodiment may be adopted in the third embodiment.

- You may change the stop position of the symbols that make up the activated line. Also, the number of active lines may be plural. For example, the pay line may be composed of the upper stop position of the left reel 13a, the middle stop position of the middle reel 13b, and the lower stop position of the right reel 13c. The stop positions of the symbols forming the activated line may not be composed of the stop positions of the symbols positioned on a straight line. For example, the pay line may be composed of the upper stop position of the left reel 13a, the middle stop position of the middle reel 13b, and the upper stop position of the right reel 13c.

- In the above embodiment, the main control CPU 40a may be configured not to store the winning information command in the output buffer when the lottery result of the combination lottery is lost. In this case, when the winning information command is not input, the sub-control CPU 41a can specify that the lottery result of the role lottery is a loss.

・In the above embodiment, even if the value of the winning lottery random number is not assigned to a winning number that allows winning of a predetermined symbol combination, the result is not limited to a loss. It can also be configured such that a symbol combination (so-called chance eye) that can be given a privilege such as execution of an additional effect or the like can be derived.

· The carryover gaming state may be a gaming state in which winning of a replay combination is more likely to be allowed than in the first gaming state. Also, the carryover gaming state may be a gaming state in which winning of a replay combination is less permitted than in the second gaming state.

- Either or both of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state may be changed. Either or both of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state are ended when the number of variable games executed in the bonus game state reaches a predetermined number, as in the single bonus game state. , may be configured to be established. The end condition of the single bonus game state is established when the number of medals granted in the bonus game state exceeds a predetermined number, as in the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state. may

・In the winning lottery table, even if the winning numbers that can be determined are distributed according to the number of bets (number of bets) from among the values within the range that can be taken as the random number for the winning lottery. good. For example, when the number of bets is small, winning a winning number may be made more difficult than when the number of bets is large. In other words, when the number of bets is small, the lottery result of the combination lottery may be more likely to lose than when the number of bets is large. Also, only when the upper limit of the number of bets is set as the number of bets, it may be possible to win the winning number that allows the winning of the bonus combination.

- The above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine that can give a penalty that causes a disadvantage to the player. Note that the penalty may be given for one variation game or for a plurality of variation games.

- It may be applied to pachinko machines. As described above, pachinko gaming machines are gaming machines in which game balls are used as game media. For example, when a display device provided in a pachinko gaming machine displays an alert image TGa to call attention to addiction, the pachinko gaming machine corresponds to a gaming machine in which the first game medium is used as a game medium, and a slot machine. corresponds to a gaming machine in which the second game medium is used as the game medium. In a pachinko game machine, a winning lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed on the condition that a game ball is shot by operating a shooting handle and the game ball enters a starting hole. The starter has a first starter called navel and a second starter called electric chew, and some pachinko machines have both of them. In the pachinko game machine, when a big win is won in a winning lottery, a big win state is generated. In a pachinko game machine, when a big win is won in a winning lottery, a big win state is generated after a big win display result is derived in a symbol variation game.

When the jackpot state is generated, after the opening performance is executed, the round game in which the big prize winning port (so-called attacker) is opened is performed a plurality of times, and the ending performance is executed after the final round game. Specifically, a predetermined opening time measurement process is performed, and an opening effect is executed when the opening time is measured. By measuring the opening time, the start of the first round game in the jackpot state is delayed. During execution of the opening effect, that is, during measurement of the opening time, a specific image among the images displayed on the display device may be displayed without moving. Also, after the opening time measurement process is performed, a round game is performed a plurality of times. A round game is a game also called an open game, in which a game ball is allowed to enter a large winning opening, and prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the big winning opening. In the round game, the big winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode. It should be noted that when the big winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode, the number of times the big winning opening is opened may be one time, or a plurality of times. Thus, in the big win state, the number of games in which the big winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode is more than one (multiple times). When a plurality of round games are performed while a big hit state is occurring, a predetermined interval time measurement process is performed between each round game. By performing the interval time measurement process, for example, the start of the next round game is delayed. In addition, after the final round game in the jackpot state, the ending time is measured, and when the ending time is measured, the ending effect is executed. By measuring the ending time, the end of the jackpot state is stagnated. During the execution of the ending effect, that is, during the measurement of the ending time, a specific image among the images displayed on the display device may be displayed without moving. In this case, when the ending time measurement process is executed, the specific image continues to be displayed without movement, and the movement of the specific image is stagnated. Further, in the pachinko machine, after the final round game in the jackpot state, during the execution of the ending effect, for example, by displaying the attention image TGa, the attention regarding the immersion may be executed. good. That is, after the execution of the ending time measurement process is started after the final round game in the jackpot state, the attention regarding the immersion may be executed. As described above, when a pachinko game machine is to call attention to addiction, the attention to addiction may be issued after the execution of the opening time measurement process is started. Further, as described above, when executing a call for attention regarding immersion in a pachinko game machine, the call for attention regarding immersion may be executed after execution of the interval time measurement process is started. As described above, the opening time measurement process, the interval time measurement process, and the ending time measurement process can be regarded as freeze control.

A pachinko machine can change the area where game balls flow down according to the amount of operation of the launch handle, and some pachinko machines can distinguish between left-handed and right-handed game balls. There is also a pachinko machine configured for In a pachinko game machine configured so that game balls can be hit separately for left-handed and right-handed hits, for example, a large winning opening may be arranged in an area where game balls flow down when hitting right-handed. In such a pachinko game machine, when a jackpot state is generated, the game ball cannot be entered into the big winning hole even if the game ball is hit to the left, and the game ball can be moved to the big winning hole by hitting to the right. It is possible to earn a profit by letting the ball enter. For this reason, there is a pachinko game machine that executes a right-handed guidance performance for guiding that a profit can be obtained by hitting right-handed when a big hit state is generated. The right-handed guidance effect can also be said to be an effect of guiding an operation that can obtain a profit. Thus, among the pachinko game machines, there is a pachinko game machine capable of generating a jackpot state in which a right-handed guidance effect is executed.

Among the pachinko game machines, there is a pachinko game machine in which a small win state is generated when a small win is won in a winning lottery, and such a pachinko game machine may be configured to call attention to immersion. . The small winning state is sometimes classified as a winning state together with the big winning state, and the big winning opening is opened even in the small winning state. In many cases, the number of times the big winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode in the small winning state is one time. Here, "the number of times the large winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode is one time" does not mean that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is one, and the predetermined opening In some cases, the number of times the large winning opening is opened may be a plurality of times. Further, the predetermined opening mode in the small winning state and the predetermined opening mode in the big winning state may or may not be the same. Thus, in the small win state, the number of games in which the big winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode is one. The big winning opening opened when the small winning state occurs and the big winning opening opened when the big winning state occurs may or may not be the same. . Further, the number of games in which the big winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode in the small winning state may be the smallest among the plurality of types of winning states including the big winning state and the small winning state. Also, the number of game media that can be obtained when the small win state occurs may be less than the number of game media that can be obtained when the big win state occurs. For example, among a plurality of types of winning states including a big winning state and a small winning state, the number of obtainable game media may be the smallest when the small winning state occurs. Then, it may be constructed such that, when a big win state is generated, the attention of the immersion is executed, but when the small win state is generated, the attention of the immersion is not executed. In other words, it may be constructed such that when a small win state occurs, the attention regarding the immersion is not executed, and when the big win state occurs, the attention regarding the immersion is executed. By the way, regardless of the big winning state and the small winning state, even if the big winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode, the predetermined number of openings are made before the big winning opening is opened in the predetermined opening mode. It can also be configured such that when a game ball enters the big winning hole, the opening of the big winning hole in a predetermined opening mode ends.

Among the pachinko game machines, there is a pachinko game machine that executes a standby effect, and during execution of the standby effect in such a pachinko game machine, for example, a warning image GT3 is displayed to execute a warning regarding immersion. You may For example, the standby effect in the present embodiment may be employed as a standby effect in a pachinko game machine, and a configuration may be made so that attention regarding immersion is executed during execution of the standby effect. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, the contents of the attention to the immersion executed during the execution of the standby performance may be the same as the contents of the attention to the immersion executed after the final round game in the jackpot state. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, the mode of calling attention to the addiction executed during execution of the standby performance may be different from the mode of calling attention to the immersion executed after the final round game in the jackpot state. In addition, in a pachinko game machine having a movable body, when executing a warning regarding immersion in a pachinko game machine, an area where an image (for example, a warning image YGa) displayed when executing a warning regarding immersion is displayed. and the motion area of a specific movable body may be configured so as not to overlap.

- The function of the main board|substrate 40 in the said embodiment may be divided|segmented into several board|substrates, and may be implement|achieved. Also, the main control CPU 40a may be composed of a plurality of CPUs mounted on a single substrate.

- In the above embodiment, a payout board may be provided to control the payout of medals as game media based on the control signal from the main board 40, and the payout board may control the payout of medals in the above embodiment. good. In such a configuration, the main board 40 and the payout board may be used as the main controller.

- The function of the sub-board 41 in the above-described embodiment may be implemented by being divided into a plurality of boards. For example, a display board that exclusively controls the effect display device 14, a lamp board that exclusively controls the decorative lamp 15, and a sound board that exclusively controls the speaker 16 may be provided, and these boards are collectively controlled. A general board may be further provided. Also, the sub control CPU 41a may be composed of a plurality of CPUs mounted on a single substrate.

Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment and another example will be added below.
o A gaming machine in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived, comprising stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and effect control means for controlling effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means is addictive is executed, the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the attention regarding immersion is executed. Characteristic game machine.

○ A game machine capable of generating a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation that can obtain a profit is executed, comprising stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and effect control means for controlling the effect execution means, The effect execution means is adapted to call attention to addiction, execute the stagnation control after the final game in the specific state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, pay attention to addiction. A gaming machine characterized in that an arousal is executed.

o In a gaming machine in which a game can be played on the condition that the number of bets has been set, and in which a special state is generated after the special display result is derived, the game machine is provided with effect control means for controlling the effect execution means, The effect executing means is adapted to call attention to the addiction, and when execution of the attention to the addiction is started after the final game in the special state, the addiction will start after the final game in the special state. When the number of bets is set after a specific period of time from the start of the attention calling for addiction, the execution of the attention calling for addiction ends, while the execution of the attention calling for addiction starts after the last game in the special state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the number of bets is set within the specific period after the game is played, the game machine continues to call attention to the addiction.

○ In a gaming machine that allows a game to be played on the condition that the number of bets is set, and that can cause a specific state in which a guidance effect that guides an operation that can obtain a profit is executed, the effect execution means is controlled. An effect control means is provided, and the effect executing means executes a call for attention regarding immersion, and when execution of a call for attention regarding immersion is started after the final game in the specific state, the specific state. If the number of bets is set after a specific period of time from the start of the call to pay attention to addiction after the final game in , the call to pay attention to addiction ends, while the call to pay attention to addiction ends after the final game in the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a bet number is set within the specific period after execution of the attention calling for the addiction is started, the attention calling for the addiction continues to be executed.

○ Effect control means for controlling the effect executing means in a gaming machine in which the first special state is generated after the first special display result is derived, and the second special state is generated after the second special display result is derived. and the effect executing means is adapted to call attention to immersion, and the number of game media obtainable when the first special state is generated is equal to the number of game media that can be obtained when the second special state is generated. The number of game media is greater than the number of game media that can be acquired if the second special state is generated, and the alert regarding immersion is not executed when the second special state is generated, and the attention regarding immersion is not executed when the first special state is generated. A game machine characterized by executing an alert.

○ In a gaming machine capable of generating a specific state, an effect control means for controlling an effect execution means is provided, and the effect execution means is adapted to call attention to immersion, and the specific state includes: There are a first specific state and a second specific state, and when the first specific state is shifted to the second specific state, attention regarding immersion is made prior to the first game in the transition to the second specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the game is not executed and the first specific state is shifted to the normal state, a warning regarding immersion is executed before the first game in the normal state to be shifted.

○ A game machine capable of generating an advantageous state is provided with effect control means for controlling effect execution means, and the effect execution means is adapted to call attention to immersion, and is executed by the effect execution means. The effect to be provided includes a specific effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage in relation to the occurrence of the advantageous state, and the specific effect is configured to be executable when attention is being drawn for the addiction. game machine.

A game machine capable of executing a standby effect, capable of playing a game on the condition that the number of bets is set, and capable of storing the number of game media as credits, wherein the settlement operation means and the settlement operation A settlement control means for performing settlement control on the condition that the means has been operated, and a performance control means for controlling the performance execution means, wherein the performance execution means calls attention to the immersion. When the settlement operation means is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 1 or more, the effect execution means starts executing the standby effect, and the standby effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that a warning regarding immersion is executed during execution.

○ A standby effect can be executed, and a replay is granted on the condition that the replay combination wins, and a predetermined number of game media is awarded to the payout combination on the condition that the payout combination wins The gaming machine comprises settlement operation means, settlement control means for performing settlement control on the condition that the settlement operation means is operated, and effect control means for controlling effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means is: During the execution of the standby effect, a call for attention regarding immersion is executed, and when the settlement operation means is operated after the replay role is won in the game, the settlement control is performed. , the execution of the standby effect is not started, and when the settlement operation means is operated after the payout combination is won in the game, the settlement control is performed, the execution of the standby effect is started, and the standby effect is started. The game machine is characterized in that a call for attention regarding immersion is executed during execution of performance.

o A gaming machine in which a game medium based on a value stored in a storage medium can be used for a game, comprising settlement operation means, and settlement control means for performing settlement control on the condition that the settlement operation means is operated; and an effect control means for controlling the effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means is adapted to call attention to the immersion, and when the attention to the immersion is being executed, the adjustment operation means is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that, when operated, the effect executing means terminates the execution of the attention calling regarding the immersion and executes the attention calling regarding the return of the storage medium.

○ A game machine capable of executing a standby effect includes effect control means for controlling effect execution means and predetermined operation means, and the effect execution means is designed to call attention to immersion. , when the predetermined operation means is operated while attention is being called for immersion during execution of the standby effect, the execution of the attention for immersion is terminated, and during execution of the standby effect, the The game machine characterized in that the effect execution means executes the effect related to the operation of the predetermined operation means after the execution of the attention calling regarding the immersion.

o In a gaming machine capable of executing a standby effect and in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived, the game machine comprises effect control means for controlling effect execution means, and the effect execution means controls the standby effect. During the execution, a warning regarding addiction is executed, and after the final game in the special state, a warning regarding immersion is executed, and the contents of the warning regarding immersion executed during execution of the standby effect. is the same as the content of the alert regarding addiction executed after the final game in the special state.

o In a gaming machine capable of executing a standby effect and capable of generating a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit is executed, comprising effect control means for controlling the effect execution means, wherein the effect is executed. The means calls attention to the immersion during execution of the standby effect, and executes attention to the immersion after the final game in the specific state, and executes during the execution of the standby effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the content of the alert regarding the addiction is the same as the content of the alert regarding the addiction executed after the final game in the specific state.

○ A reel comprising a plurality of reels and a transmissive display, wherein the transmissive display is arranged on the front side of the plurality of reels, and the display area of the transmissive display allows the reel arranged on the rear side to be visually recognized. A game characterized in that a predetermined attention calling image is displayed in a display area different from the reel viewing area among the display areas of the transmissive display to call attention to immersion. machine.

○ A specific movable body, an action control means for controlling the action of the specific movable body, and an effect control means for controlling an effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means includes a effect area including a predetermined effect area. and the effect control means can perform control to call attention to the immersion in the predetermined effect area. A gaming machine characterized by being an area that does not overlap with an area.

○ A specific movable body, an action control means for controlling the action of the specific movable body, and an effect control means for controlling an effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means includes a effect area including a predetermined effect area. and the effect control means can perform control to call attention to the immersion in the predetermined effect area, and when the specific movable body does not operate, the specific movable body is displayed in a front view. There is a case where an alert regarding immersion is executed in the predetermined effect area that overlaps with the movement area of the body, and when the specific movable body moves, the execution of the attention regarding immersion is limited. game machine.

o A gaming machine in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived, comprising stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and effect control means for controlling effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means is addictive is to be executed, the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the attention is drawn to immersion is executed.

○ A game machine capable of generating a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation that can obtain a profit is executed, comprising stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and effect control means for controlling the effect execution means, The effect executing means is designed to call attention to immersion, and the stagnation control is executed before the start of the first game in the specific state, and execution of the stagnation control is started. A gaming machine characterized in that, after the player has played the game, an alert regarding the immersion is executed.

o A gaming machine in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived, comprising stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and effect control means for controlling effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means is addictive is executed, the stagnation control is executed when it is in the special state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the attention regarding immersion is executed. game machine.

○ A game machine capable of generating a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation that can obtain a profit is executed, comprising stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and effect control means for controlling the effect execution means, The effect executing means is adapted to call attention to the immersion, the stagnation control is executed when the specific state is established, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the attention to the immersion is issued. A game machine characterized by being executed.

○ Of the plurality of types of special states including the first special state and the second special state, the number of games played in the second special state is the smallest.
○ Among the plurality of types of special states including the first special state and the second special state, the number of game media that can be acquired is the smallest when the second special state occurs.

○ A game machine in which the first game medium is used as a game medium, and the content of the call for attention regarding addiction is a game machine in which the first game medium is used as the game medium. In addition, it includes a call for attention regarding immersion in a game in a gaming machine in which the second game medium is used as the game medium.

The game medium is returned to the player by operating a specific operation unit that the player can operate, and the first special state is generated after the first special display result is derived. In a gaming machine in which a second special state is generated after a second special display result is derived, an effect control means for controlling an effect execution means is provided, wherein the effect execution means calls attention to immersion. The number of game media that can be acquired when the first special state occurs is greater than the number of game media that can be acquired when the second special state occurs, and the second When the special state occurs, the attention regarding the immersion is not executed, when the first special state occurs, the attention regarding the immersion is executed, and when the first special state occurs. a period during which the alert regarding immersion continues to be executed and the first special state is controlled even if the specific operation unit is operated when the attention regarding immersion is being executed; In an advantageous period including a period controlled to a second special state and a period controlled to a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation that can obtain a profit is executed, the condition for ending the advantageous period is Triggered by the establishment, the advantageous period ends, and is executed after the final game in the first special state when the condition for ending the advantageous period is established by the occurrence of the first special state. A mode of calling attention to addiction is a mode of calling attention to addiction that is executed after the final game in the first special state when the termination condition of the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the first special state. A gaming machine characterized by being different from

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine 13a-13c... Reel 14... Effect display device 14a... Transmissive area 15... Decoration lamp 16... Speaker 17... Medal slot 18... Bet button 19... Settlement button 20... Start Lever 21a to 21c Stop button 25 Heart movable body 26 Star movable body 30 Information panel 40 Main substrate 40a Main control CPU 40b Main control ROM 40c Main control RAM 41 Sub-board 41a Sub-control CPU 41b Sub-control ROM 41c Sub-control RAM 45 Set value switch BL Backlight EB Effect button HU Hopper unit.

Claims (2)

The game machine is constructed so that game media are returned to the player by operating a specific operation part operable by the player, and can generate a first special state and a second special state with different profits. in
a detecting means capable of detecting the game media entered through a specific opening;
A production control means for controlling the production execution means,
The effect execution means is designed to call attention to the immersion,
When the second special state occurs, the attention regarding the immersion is not executed, and when the first special state occurs, the attention regarding the immersion is executed,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a call for attention regarding immersion in a specific period after starting execution of a call for attention regarding addiction after the final game in the first special state, and in addition, the specific period ends . It is possible to call attention to immersion after
Even if the detection means detects the game medium while the attention is being called for addiction within the specific period, the execution of the attention for addiction is continued, but then the specific period ends. Then, the execution of the alert about immersion ends,
After the end of the specific period, when the detection means detects the game medium while the attention is being called for the addiction, the execution of the attention for the addiction is finished,
If the specific operation unit is operated while a warning regarding immersion is being executed within the specific period, the execution of the warning regarding immersion is continued,
A game machine characterized in that even if the specific operating unit is operated while the attention is being called for the addiction after the end of the specific period, the execution of the attention for the addiction is continued. . A period of control to the first special state, a period of control to the second special state, and a period of control to a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of obtaining a profit is executed. , the advantageous period ends when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met,
The aspect of calling attention to immersion executed after the final game in the first special state when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are satisfied by the occurrence of the first special state is as follows: 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, which is different from the mode of calling attention to immersion executed after the final game in the first special state when the termination condition of the advantageous period is not satisfied by being caused.

Images